Introduction

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2009 Fit was a wise investment. It As you read this manual, you will find will give you years of driving pleasure. information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read intended to help you avoid damage to this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and your vehicle, other property, or the convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner's manual in your vehicle so environment. you can refer to it at any time. Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities. Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer's staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

2009 Fit i Introduction

California Proposition 65 Warning WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, deployment data, and the failure of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner. Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to the vehicle owner.

ii 2009 Fit A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including: is very important. And operating this ● Safety Labels － on the vehicle. vehicle safely is an important responsibility. ● Safety Messages － preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING,orCAUTION. To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean: provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don't follow instructions. you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY Of course, it is not practical or HURT if you don't follow instructions. possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or You CAN be HURT if you don't follow maintaining your vehicle. You must instructions. use your own good judgement. ● Safety Headings － such as Important Safety Reminders or Important Safety Precautions.

● Safety Section － such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

● Instructions － how to use this vehicle correctly and safely. This entire book is filled with important safety information － please read it carefully.

2009 Fit iii 2009 Fit Online Reference Owner's Manual

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ...... i

A Few Words About Safety ...... iii Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ...... 3 Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ...... 5 Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, steering wheel, and other convenience items) ...... 57 Features (heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control) ...... 109 Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ...... 197 Driving ( and operation) ...... 213 Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)...... 243 Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) ...... 283 Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ...... 315 Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 331 Index ...... I

Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

00X31-TK6-6003 1 Overview of Contents

Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer Relations A convenient reference to the What to use, how to break- (U.S. and Canada only) sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load A summary of the warranties luggage and other cargo. covering your new vehicle, and how Your Vehicle at a Glance to contact us for any reason. Refer to A quick reference to the main Driving controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, your warranty manual for detailed shift the transmission, and park. information. Driver and Passenger Safety Important information about the Maintenance Index proper use and care of your vehicle's The maintenance minder shows you Service Information Summary seat belts, an overview of the when you need to take your vehicle A summary of the information you supplemental restraint system, and to the dealer for maintenance need when you pull up to the fuel valuable information on how to service. There is also a list of things pump. protect children with child restraints. to check and instructions on how to check them. Instruments and Controls Explains the purpose of each Taking Care of the Unexpected instrument panel indicator and This section covers several problems gauge, and how to use the controls motorists sometimes experience, and on the dashboard and steering details how to handle them. column. Technical Information Features ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, How to operate the heating and air and technical information. conditioning system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

2 2009 Fit Your Vehicle at a Glance

DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG INSTRUMENT PANEL AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 9, 25) INDICATOR (P. 60) (P. 115, 143) GAUGES (P. 68) NAVIGATION SYSTEMꭧ Glance a at Vehicle Your MIRROR CONTROLS (P. 101) PASSENGER'S FRONT AIRBAG (P. 9, 25) DOOR LOCK TAB (P. 81) USB ADAPTER CABLEꭧ POWER DOOR LOCK (P. 130, 137, 171, 178) MASTER SWITCHꭧ (P. 81) HEATING/COOLING POWER WINDOW CONTROLSꭧ SWITCHES (P. 110) (P. 100)

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE (P. 200)

PARKING BRAKE (P. 219) (P. 102) (P. 217) Vehicle with navigation system is shown. : If equipped CONTINUED

2009 Fit 3 Your Vehicle at a Glance

ꭧ 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL PADDLE SHIFTER WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS PADDLE SHIFTER HORN ꭧ 2 (DOWNSHIFT)ꭧ 2 BRIGHTNESS (P. 76) (UPSHIFT) (P. 73) (P. 224) (P. 224) HEADLIGHTS/ TURN SIGNAL/ ꭧ2 HAZARD WARNING FOG LIGHTS BUTTON (P. 74) (P. 76) REMOTE AUDIO PASSENGER CONTROL AIRBAG OFF BUTTONSꭧ 2 INDICATOR (P. 189) (P. 31) NAVIGATION REAR WINDOW SYSTEM VOICE DEFOGGER/ CONTROL HEATED MIRROR BUTTONSꭧ 3 BUTTONꭧ2 (P. 76/102) AUXILIARY INPUT JACK VEHICLE STABILITY (P. 190) ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF ꭧ ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET SWITCH 2 (P. 106) (P. 234) STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONSꭧ 2 (P. 77) (P. 194) Vehicle with navigation system is shown. ꭧ1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel. ꭧ2: If equipped. ꭧ3: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

4 2009 Fit Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt ...... 19 If You Must Drive with Several information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Children ...... 37 yourself and your passengers. It Tensioners ...... 20 If a Child Requires Close shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt Maintenance ...... 20 Attention ...... 37 explains how your work. And Additional Information About Your Additional Safety Precautions..... 38 Safety Passenger and Driver it tells you how to properly restrain Airbags ...... 22 Protecting Infants and Small infants and children in your vehicle. Airbag System Components ...... 22 Children ...... 39 How Your Front Airbags Work... 25 Protecting Infants ...... 39 Important Safety Precautions ...... 6 How Your Side Airbags Work .... 28 Protecting Small Children ...... 40 Your Vehicle's Safety Features ...... 7 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat ...... 41 Seat Belts ...... 8 Work...... 30 Installing a Child Seat ...... 42 Airbags...... 9 How the SRS Indicator Works.... 30 Installing a Child Seat with Protecting Adults and Teens ...... 11 How the Side Airbag Off LATCH...... 43 1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11 Indicator Works...... 31 Installing a Child Seat with a 2. Adjust the Front Seats ...... 11 How the Passenger Airbag Off Lap/Shoulder Belt ...... 45 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs...... 12 Indicator Works...... 31 Installing a Child Seat with a 4. Adjust the Head Restraints ..... 13 Airbag Service ...... 32 Tether ...... 47 5. Fasten and Position the Seat Additional Safety Precautions..... 33 Protecting Larger Children ...... 49 Belts ...... 14 Protecting Children － General Checking Seat Belt Fit ...... 49 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Guidelines ...... 34 Using a Booster Seat...... 50 Position ...... 15 All Children Must Be When Can a Larger Child Sit in Advice for Pregnant Women ...... 16 Restrained ...... 34 Front ...... 51 Additional Safety Precautions..... 17 All Children Should Sit in a Back Additional Safety Precautions..... 52 Additional Information About Your Seat...... 35 Carbon Monoxide Hazard...... 53 Seat Belts...... 18 The Passenger's Front Airbag Safety Labels ...... 54 Seat Belt System Components.... 18 Can Pose Serious Risks...... 35 2009 Fit 5 Important Safety Precautions

You'll find many safety Restrain All Children Don't Drink and Drive recommendations throughout this Children age 12 and under should Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even section, and throughout this manual. ride properly restrained in a back one drink can reduce your ability to The recommendations on this page seat, not the front seat. Infants and respond to changing conditions, and are the ones we consider to be the small children should be restrained your reaction time gets worse with most important. in a child seat. Larger children every additional drink. So don't drink should use a booster seat and a lap/ and drive, and don't let your friends Always Wear Your Seat Belt drink and drive, either. A seat belt is your best protection in shoulder belt until they can use the Control Your Speed all types of collisions. Airbags are belt properly without a booster seat (see pages 34 － 52). Excessive speed is a major factor in designed to supplement seat belts, crash injuries and deaths. Generally, not replace them. So even though Be Aware of Airbag Hazards the higher the speed, the greater the your vehicle is equipped with While airbags can save lives, they risk, but serious injuries can also occur airbags, make sure you and your can cause serious or fatal injuries to at lower speeds. Never drive faster passengers always wear your seat occupants who sit too close to them, than is safe for current conditions, belts, and wear them properly (see or are not properly restrained. regardless of the maximum speed page 14). Infants, young children, and short posted. adults are at the greatest risk. Be Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition sure to follow all instructions and Having a tire blowout or a mechanical warnings in this manual. failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance (see page 245).

6 2009 Fit Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many (3) (4) (9) features that work together to protect you and your passengers during a (1) crash. (11) Safety Passenger and Driver Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a (7) safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, (5) and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a crash. However, you and your passengers (2) can't take full advantage of these (6) features unless you remain sitting in (10) a proper position and always wear (8) (1) Safety Cage (2) Crush Zones your seat belts. In fact, some safety (3) Seats and Seat-Backs features can contribute to injuries if (4) Head Restraints they are not used properly. (2) (5) Collapsible Steering Column (6) Seat Belts The following pages explain how you (7) Front Airbags can take an active role in protecting (8) Side Airbags (9) Side Curtain Airbags yourself and your passengers. (10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners (11) Door Locks

2009 Fit 7 Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Seat Belts ● Help keep you from being thrown Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants. increases the chance of serious Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even ● Keep you from being thrown out of an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has the vehicle. and a beeper to remind you and your airbags. ● Help keep you in a good position passengers to fasten your seat belts. should the airbags ever deploy. A Why Wear Seat Belts Be sure you and your good position reduces the risk of Seat belts are the single most passengers always wear seat injury from an inflating airbag and effective safety device for adults and belts and wear them properly. allows you to get the best larger children. (Infants and smaller advantage from the airbag. children must be properly restrained When properly worn, seat belts: in child seats.) Of course, seat belts cannot ● Keep you connected to the vehicle completely protect you in every Not wearing a seat belt properly so you can take advantage of the crash. But in most cases, seat belts increases the chance of serious vehicle's built-in safety features. can reduce your risk of serious injury or death in a crash, even injury. though your vehicle has airbags. ● Help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: What You Should Do: In addition, most states and all － frontal impacts Always wear your seat belt, and Canadian provinces require you to － side impacts make sure you wear it properly. wear seat belts. － rear impacts － rollovers

8 2009 Fit Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Airbags rvradPsegrSafety Passenger and Driver

Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the Your vehicle has a supplemental driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger, restraint system (SRS) with front during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear airbags to help protect the heads and impact (see page 28 for more seating positions during a moderate chests of the driver and a front seat information on how your side airbags to severe side or front impact (see passenger during a moderate to work). page 30 for more information on how severe frontal collision (see page 25 your side curtain airbags work). for more information on how your front airbags work).

CONTINUED 2009 Fit 9 Your Vehicle's Safety Features

The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you

● upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety. Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while They are designed to supplement Remember, however, that no safety allowing full control of the vehicle. A the seat belts. system can prevent all injuries or front passenger should move their deaths that can occur in a severe ● Airbags offer no protection in rear seat as far back from the dashboard crash, even when seat belts are impacts, or minor frontal or side as possible. collisions. properly worn and the airbags deploy. ● Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries or more serious or even fatal injuries if occupants are not properly restrained or sitting properly.

10 2009 Fit Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Your vehicle has a door and 2. Adjust the Front Seats The following pages provide tailgate open indicator on instructions on how to properly the instrument panel to indicate protect the driver, adult passengers, when any door or the tailgate is not and teenage children who are large tightly closed. Safety Passenger and Driver enough and mature enough to drive Locking the doors reduces the or ride in the front. chance of someone being thrown out See pages 34 － 38 for important of the vehicle during a crash, and it guidelines on how to properly protect helps prevent passengers from infants, small children, and larger accidentally opening a door and children who ride in your vehicle. falling out. 1. Close and Lock the Doors Locking the doors and the tailgate After everyone has entered the also helps prevent an outsider from vehicle, be sure the doors and the unexpectedly opening a door or the Adjust the driver's seat as far to the tailgate are closed and locked. tailgate when you come to a stop. rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. See page 81 for how to lock the Have a front passenger adjust their doors, and page 62 for how the door seat as far to the rear as possible. and tailgate open indicator works. Some models have the auto door locking/unlocking feature. For more information, see page 83.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 11 Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs wheel or dashboard, you can be seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front airbags inflate. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible. allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. In addition to Once a seat is adjusted correctly, adjusting the seat, you can adjust the rock it back and forth to make sure it steering wheel up and down, and in is locked in position. and out (see page 77). See page 93 for how to adjust the Adjust the driver's seat-back to a If you cannot get far enough away front seats. comfortable, upright position, leaving from the steering wheel and still ample space between your chest and reach the controls, we recommend the airbag cover in the center of the that you investigate whether some steering wheel. type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat- backs should also adjust their seat- back to a comfortable, upright position.

12 2009 Fit Protecting Adults and Teens

4. Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the rear center seating position, make Reclining the seat-back too far sure the center head restraint is can result in serious injury or properly positioned. death in a crash. Safety Passenger and Driver

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well Improperly positioning head back in the seat. restraints reduces their effectiveness and you can be Reclining a seat-back so that the seriously injured in a crash. shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant's chest Make sure head restraints are reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver's head restraint so in place and positioned properly the belt. It also increases the chance the center of the back of your head before driving. of sliding under the belt in a crash rests against the center of the and being seriously injured. The restraint. Properly adjusted head restraints will farther a seat-back is reclined, the help protect occupants from whiplash greater the risk of injury. Have passengers adjust their head restraints properly as well. Taller and other crash injuries. See page 93 for how to adjust the persons should adjust their restraint See page 94 for how to adjust the seat-backs. as high as possible. head restraints and how the driver's and front passenger's active head restraints work.

2009 Fit 13 Protecting Adults and Teens

5. Fasten and Position the Seat Belts Insert the latch plate into the buckle, Improperly positioning the seat then tug on the belt to make sure the belts can cause serious injury belt is securely latched. Check that or death in a crash. the belt is not twisted, because a twisted belt can cause serious Make sure all seat belts are injuries in a crash. properly positioned before driving. The seat belt in the center position of the back seat can be unlatched and retracted to allow the back seat to be If the seat belt touches or crosses folded up or down. This seat belt your neck, or if it crosses your arm Position the lap part of the belt as low as should be latched whenever the seat- instead of your shoulder, you need to possible across your hips, then pull up adjust the seat belt anchor height. back is in an upright position. See on the shoulder part of the belt so the page 99 for how to unlatch and lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong relatch the seat belt. pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

14 2009 Fit Protecting Adults and Teens

Never place the shoulder portion of a 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and head restraints, and rvradPsegrSafety Passenger and Driver If a seat belt does not seem to work put on their seat belts, it is very properly, it may not protect the important that they continue to sit occupant in a crash. upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the No one should sit in a seat with an vehicle is parked and the engine is inoperative seat belt. Using a seat off. belt that is not working properly can RELEASE BUTTONS result in serious injury or death. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For The front seats have adjustable seat Have your dealer check the belt as soon as possible. example, if an occupant slouches, lies belt anchors. To adjust the height of down, turns sideways, sits forward, an anchor, squeeze the two release See page 18 for additional leans forward or sideways, or puts buttons, and slide the anchor up or information about your seat belts and one or both feet up, the chance of down as needed (it has four how to take care of them. injury during a crash is greatly positions). increased.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 15 Protecting Adults and Teens

In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat inflating front airbag. as far back as possible. This will reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by a crash or an Sitting improperly or out of inflating front airbag. position can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it's okay for you to drive. Always sit upright, well back in If you are pregnant, the best way to the seat, with your feet on the protect yourself and your unborn floor. child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

16 2009 Fit Protecting Adults and Teens

Additional Safety Precautions ● Two people should never use the ● Keep your hands and arms away ● Never let passengers ride in the same seat belt. If they do, they from the airbag covers. If your cargo area or on top of a folded- could be very seriously injured in a hands or arms are close to an down back seat. If they do, they crash. airbag cover, they could be injured could be very seriously injured in a if the airbag inflates. Safety Passenger and Driver crash. ● Do not put any accessories on seat belts. Devices intended to improve ● Do not attach or place objects on ● Never let passengers ride in the occupant comfort or reposition the the front airbag covers. Objects on area in front of a folded-up rear shoulder part of a seat belt can the covers marked ‘‘ SRS seat or on top of a folded-down rear reduce the protective capability of AIRBAG ’’ could interfere with the seat. If they do, they could be very the belt and increase the chance of proper operation of the airbags or seriously injured in a crash. serious injury in a crash. be propelled inside the vehicle and

● hurt someone if the airbags inflate. Passengers should not stand up or ● Do not place hard or sharp objects change seats while the vehicle is between yourself and a front ● Do not attach hard objects on or moving. A passenger who is not airbag. Carrying hard or sharp near a door. If a side airbag or a wearing a seat belt during a crash objects on your lap, or driving with side curtain airbag inflates, a cup or emergency stop can be thrown a pipe or other sharp object in your holder or other hard object against the inside of the vehicle, mouth, can result in injuries if your attached on or near the door could against other occupants, or out of front airbag inflates. be propelled inside the vehicle and the vehicle. hurt someone.

2009 Fit 17 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components If a front passenger does not fasten If the indicator comes on or the Your seat belt system includes lap/ their seat belt, the indicator will beeper sounds when the driver's seat shoulder belts in all seating positions. come on about 6 seconds after the belt is latched and there is no front The front seat belts are also equipped ignition switch is turned to the ON seat passenger and no items on the with automatic seat belt tensioners. (II) position. front seat, something may be interfering with the monitoring If either the driver or a front This system uses the same sensors as system. Look for and remove: the front airbags to monitor whether passenger does not fasten their seat the front seat belts are latched or belt while driving, the beeper will ● Any items under the front unlatched, and how much weight is on sound and the indicator will flash passenger's seat. the front passenger's seat (see page again at regular intervals. ● 27). Any object(s) hanging on the seat When no one is sitting in the front or in the seat-back pocket. The seat belt system includes passenger's seat, or a child or small ● Any object(s) touching the rear of an indicator on the instrument adult is riding there, the indicator the seat-back. panel and a beeper to remind you and should not come on and the beeper your passengers to fasten your seat should not sound. If no obstructions are found, have belts. your vehicle checked by a dealer. This system monitors the front seat belts. If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before your seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash. If your seat belt is not fastened before the beeper stops, the indicator will stop flashing but remain on.

18 2009 Fit Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency The lap/shoulder belt goes over your locking retractor. In normal driving, shoulder, across your chest, and the retractor lets you move freely in across your hips. your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt. During a collision or Safety Passenger and Driver To fasten the belt, insert the latch sudden stop, the retractor plate into the buckle, then tug on the automatically locks the belt to help belt to make sure the buckle is restrain your body. latched (see page 14 for how to properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except the driver's have a lockable retractor To unlock the belt, press the red DETACHABLE that must be activated to secure a PRESS button on the buckle. Guide ANCHOR child seat (see page 45). the belt across your body so that it The lap/shoulder belt in the center retracts completely. After exiting the If the shoulder part of the belt is seating position on the rear seat is vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the pulled all the way out, the lockable equipped with a detachable seat belt way and will not get closed in the retractor will activate. The belt will that has two parts: a small latch plate door. retract, but it will not allow the and an anchor buckle. passenger to move freely. The detachable seat belt should To deactivate the lockable retractor, normally be latched whenever the unlatch the buckle and let the seat seat-backs are in an upright position. belt fully retract. To refasten the seat For more information about the belt, pull it out only as far as needed. detachable seat belt, see page 99.

2009 Fit 19 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to Seat Belt Maintenance activate in any collision severe For safety, you should check the enough to cause the front airbags to condition of your seat belts regularly. deploy. Pull each belt out fully, and look for If a side curtain airbag deploys frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check during a side impact, the tensioner that the latches work smoothly and on that side of the vehicle will also the belts retract easily. If a belt does deploy. not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem (see page The tensioners can also be activated 267). Any belt that is not in good during a collision in which the front condition or working properly will airbags do not deploy. In this case, the not provide good protection and airbags would not be needed, but the should be replaced as soon as additional restraint could be helpful. For added protection, the front seat possible. When the tensioners are activated, belts are equipped with automatic Honda provides a limited warranty seat belt tensioners. When activated, the seat belts will remain tight until on seat belts. See your Honda they are unbuckled. the tensioners immediately tighten Warranty Information booklet for the belts to help hold the driver and a details. front passenger in position.

20 2009 Fit Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

If a seat belt is worn during a crash, it must be replaced by your dealer. A belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts Safety Passenger and Driver do not work properly when The dealer should also inspect the needed. anchors for damage and replace them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.

2009 Fit 21 Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

(8) (9) (10) (2) (11)

(5) (12) (1)

(3) (1) Driver's Front Airbag (2) Passenger's Front Airbag (3) Control Unit (4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners (6) (5) Side Airbags (4) (6) Driver's Seat Position Sensor (7) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors (8) Front Impact Sensors (9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (7) (10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors (11) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit (12) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator (4) (5)

22 2009 Fit Additional Information About Your Airbags

Your airbag system includes: (13) ● Two SRS (supplemental restraint system) front airbags. The driver's

airbag is stored in the center of the Safety Passenger and Driver steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ (see page 25).

● Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE AIRBAG’’ (see page 28). (14) ● Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front (15) (15) and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page 30). (14) (13) Side Curtain Airbags (14) Side Impact Sensors (First) (15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 23 Additional Information About Your Airbags

● Automatic front seat belt ● Weight sensors that monitor the ● An indicator on the instrument tensioners (see page 20). weight on the front passenger's panel that alerts you that the seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs passenger's side airbag has been ● Sensors that can detect a moderate (29 kg) or less (the weight of an turned off (see page 31). to severe front impact or side infant or small child), the impact. ● An indicator on the dashboard that passenger's front airbag will be alerts you that the passenger's ● Sensors that can detect whether a turned off (see page 27). front airbag has been turned off child is in the passenger's side ● A sophisticated electronic system (see page 31). airbag path and signal the control that continually monitors and unit to turn the airbag off (see ● Emergency backup power in case records information about the page 29). your vehicle's electrical system is sensors, the control unit, the disconnected in a crash. ● Sensors that can detect whether airbag activators, the seat belt the driver's seat belt and the front tensioners, and driver and front passenger's seat belt are latched or passenger seat belt use when the unlatched (see page 18). ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. ● A driver's seat position sensor that monitors the distance of the seat ● An indicator on the instrument from the front airbag. If the seat is panel that alerts you to a possible too far forward, the airbag will problem with your airbags, inflate with less force (see page sensors, or seat belt tensioners 27). (see page 30).

24 2009 Fit Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt restrains your lower body and torso, and the front airbag helps protect your head and chest. rvradPsegrSafety Passenger and Driver Although both airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In After inflating, the front airbags such cases, the seat belt will provide immediately deflate, so they won't If you ever have a moderate to severe sufficient protection, and the interfere with the driver's visibility, frontal collision, sensors will detect supplemental protection offered by or the ability to steer or operate other the vehicle's rapid deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. controls. If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver's airbag can deploy if The total time for inflation and enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front deflation is one-tenth of a second, so inflate the driver's and front seat, or if the advanced airbag fast that most occupants are not passenger's airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger's aware that the airbags deployed until with the force needed. airbag off (see page 27). they see them lying in their laps.

CONTINUED 2009 Fit 25 Additional Information About Your Airbags

After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags looks like smoke. This is actually Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual- powder from the airbag's surface. airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this Although the powder is not harmful, inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment people with respiratory problems sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether may experience some temporary depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is wearing a seat belt or not. discomfort. If this occurs, get out of In a more severe crash, both stages the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant's belt is not latched, so. the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly lower threshold, because the In a crash, one stage will less severe occupant would need extra ignite first, then the second stage will protection. ignite a split second later. This provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant's belt is latched, the with a little less force. airbag will deploy at a slightly higher threshold, when the airbag would be needed to supplement the protection provided by the seat belt.

26 2009 Fit Driver and Passenger Safety 27

CONTINUED PASSENGER'S SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS The passenger's advanced front airbag system has weight sensors under the seat. Although Hondanot does encourage carrying an infantsmall or child in front, ifdetect the the sensors weight of ansmall infant child or (up to aboutkg), 65 the lbs system or will 29 automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. Be aware that objects placedpassenger's on seat the can also causeairbag the to be turned off. DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR Additional Information About Your Airbags 2009 Fit The driver's advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor under the seat. Iftoo the far seat forward, is the airbagwith will less inflate force, regardless ofseverity the of the impact. If there is a problemthe with SRS the indicator sensor, will comethe on, airbag and will inflate inmanner the regardless normal of the driver's seating position. Occupants must sit upright and wear their seat belts properly. Do not spill any liquidsunder on the or seats, cover theor sensors, put any objects orunder metal the items front seats. Back-seat passengers should not put their feet under the front seats. ● ● ● Failure to follow these instructions could damage the sensors orthem prevent from working properly. Advanced Airbags Your front airbags are alsoairbags. advanced The main purpose offeature this is to help preventcaused airbag- injuries to short driverschildren and who ride in front. For both advanced airbags toproperly: work Additional Information About Your Airbags

When the airbag is turned off, a ● Moving the front seat forcibly back How Your Side Airbags Work ‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in against cargo on the seat or floor the center of the dashboard comes behind it. on (see page 31). ● Hanging heavy items on the front If the weight sensors detect there is passenger seat, or placing heavy no passenger in the front seat, the items in the seat-back pocket. airbag will be off. However, the ● Moving the front seat or seat-back passenger airbag off indicator will forcibly back against the folded not come on. rear seat. To ensure that the passenger's If your vehicle has optional floor advanced front airbag system will mats, make sure the mat behind the work properly, do not do anything that would increase or decrease the driver's seat is hooked to the floor weight on the front passenger's seat. mat anchor (see page 267). If it is If you ever have a moderate to severe This includes: not, the mat may interfere with the side impact, sensors will detect rapid proper operation of the sensors and acceleration and signal the control ● A rear passenger pushing or operation of the seat. unit to instantly inflate either the pulling on the back of the front driver's or the passenger's side passenger's seat. airbag.

28 2009 Fit Additional Information About Your Airbags

Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 31), have the passenger passenger's side, the passenger's system designed primarily to protect sit upright. Once the passenger is side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger's out of the airbag's deployment path, is no passenger. seat. the system will turn the airbag back Safety Passenger and Driver on, and the indicator will go out. To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the There will be some delay between should wear their seat belts and sit position sensors detect a child has the moment the passenger moves upright and well back in their seats. leaned into the side airbag's into or out of the airbag deployment deployment path, the airbag will shut path and when the indicator comes off. on or goes off. The side airbag may also shut off if a A front seat passenger should not short adult leans sideways, or a use a cushion or other object as a larger adult slouches and leans backrest. It may prevent the cutoff sideways into the airbag's system from working properly. deployment path. Objects placed on the front passenger seat can also cause the side airbag to be shut off.

2009 Fit 29 Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger's How the SRS Indicator Works Work side, the passenger's side curtain The SRS indicator alerts airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags or seat belt One or both side curtain airbags may tensioners. inflate in a moderate to severe frontal When you turn the ignition switch to collision which causes the front the ON (II) position, this indicator airbags to deploy. comes on briefly then goes off. This To get the best protection from the tells you the system is working side curtain airbags, occupants properly. should wear their seat belts and sit If the indicator comes on at any other upright and well back in their seats. time, or does not come on at all, you SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG should have the system checked by In a moderate to severe side impact, your dealer. For example: sensors will detect rapid acceleration ● If the SRS indicator does not come and signal the control unit to on after you turn the ignition instantly inflate the side curtain switch to the ON (II) position. airbag and activate the seat belt ● If the indicator stays on after the tensioner on the driver's or the engine starts. passenger's side of the vehicle. ● If the indicator comes on or flashes on and off while you drive.

30 2009 Fit Additional Information About Your Airbags

If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off Indicator How the Passenger Airbag Off the airbags and seat belt tensioners Works Indicator Works may not work properly when you U.S. Canada need them. U.S. This indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG Safety Passenger and Driver alerts you that the OFF INDICATOR passenger's side airbag has been automatically shut off. It does not Ignoring the SRS indicator can mean there is a problem with your result in serious injury or death side airbags. if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work When you turn the ignition switch to properly. the ON (II) position, the indicator should come on briefly and then go Have your vehicle checked by a off (see page 61). If it doesn't come On vehicle with navigation system dealer as soon as possible if on, stays on, or comes on while This indicator alerts you that the the SRS indicator alerts you to driving without a passenger in the passenger's front airbag has been a possible problem. front seat, have the system checked. shut off because weight sensors detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child) on the front passenger's seat. It does not mean there is a problem with the airbag.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 31 Additional Information About Your Airbags

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR If an adult or teenage passenger is Airbag Service U.S. Canada riding in front, move the seat as far to Your airbag systems are virtually the rear as possible, and have the maintenance free, and there are no passenger sit upright and wear the parts you can safely service. seat belt properly. However, you must have your vehicle serviced if: If the indicator comes on with no front seat passenger and no objects ● An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag on the seat, or with an adult riding that has deployed must be there, something may be interfering replaced along with the control with the weight sensors. Look for unit and other related parts. Any On vehicle without navigation system and remove: seat belt tensioner that activates must also be replaced. Be aware that objects placed on the ● Any items under the front front seat can cause the indicator to passenger's seat. Do not try to remove or replace come on. any airbag by yourself. This must ● Any object hanging on the seat or be done by an authorized dealer or in the seat-back pocket. If the weight sensors detect there is a knowledgeable body shop. no passenger in the front seat, the ● Any object(s), such as a folded- airbag will be off. However, the ● The SRS indicator alerts you to a down back seat, that are touching Take your vehicle to an passenger airbag off indicator will the rear of the seat-back. problem. not come on. authorized dealer as soon as If no obstructions are found, have possible. If you ignore this The passenger airbag off indicator your vehicle checked by a dealer as indication, your airbags may not may come on and off repeatedly if the soon as possible. operate properly. total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.

32 2009 Fit Additional Information About Your Airbags

● If your vehicle has a moderate to Additional Safety Precautions ● Do not cover or replace front seat- severe impact. Even if your airbags ● Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting do not inflate, your dealer should airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing inspect the driver's seat position seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers sensor, the front passenger's protection. can prevent your side airbags from Safety Passenger and Driver inflating during a side impact. weight sensors, the front seat belt ● tensioners, and all seat belts worn Do not tamper with airbag components or wiring for any ● Do not remove or modify a front during a crash to make sure they reason. Tampering could cause seat without consulting your are operating properly. the airbags to deploy, possibly dealer. This could make the causing very serious injury. driver's seat position sensor or the front passenger's weight sensors ● Do not expose the front ineffective. If it is necessary to passenger's seat-back to liquid. If remove or modify a front seat to water or another liquid soaks into accommodate a person with a seat-back, it can prevent the side disabilities, first contact Honda airbag cutoff system from working Automobile Customer Service at properly. (800) 999-1009.

2009 Fit 33 Protecting Children－ General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a accidents are the number one cause crash. of the death of children aged 12 and under. Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary. Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a them. However, despite their best vehicle. intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a passengers. restrained in an approved child seat booster seat until the seat belt fits that is properly secured to the vehicle them properly (see pages 49 － 52). If you have children, or ever need to (see pages 39 － 48). drive with a child in your vehicle, be sure to read this section. It begins with important general guidelines, then presents special information for infants, small children, and larger children.

34 2009 Fit Protecting Children－ General Guidelines

All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger's Front Airbag Can Small Children Seat Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger's front airbag can be safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too Safety Passenger and Driver back seat. the passenger's front airbag is quite far forward, or the child's head is large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an The National Highway Traffic Safety force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child. aged 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system that restrained in a back seat. Some automatically turns the passenger's Larger Children states have laws restricting where front airbag off (see page 31), please Children who have outgrown child seats are also at risk of being injured children may ride. follow these guidelines: or killed by an inflating passenger's Children who ride in back are less Infants front airbag. Whenever possible, likely to be injured by striking Never put a rear-facing child seat in larger children should sit in the back interior vehicle parts during a the front seat of a vehicle equipped seat, on a booster seat if needed, and collision or hard braking. Also, with a passenger's front airbag. If the be properly restrained with a seat children cannot be injured by an airbag inflates, it can hit the back of belt (see page 49 for important inflating front airbag when they ride the child seat with enough force to information about protecting larger in the back. kill or very seriously injure an infant. children).

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 35 Protecting Children－ General Guidelines

To remind you of the passenger's U.S. Models front airbag hazards, and that DASHBOARD children must be properly restrained SUN VISORS in a back seat, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

Canadian Models SUN VISORS

36 2009 Fit Protecting Children－ General Guidelines

If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact, Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put we strongly recommend that another children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front adult ride with the child in a back If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the seat. The back seat is far safer for a Safety Passenger and Driver children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child than the front. front: attention.

● Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close belt properly (see page 49). attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of ● Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk. rear as possible (see page 93).

● Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat (see page 15).

● Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured (see page 14).

2009 Fit 37 Protecting Children－ General Guidelines

Additional Safety Precautions ● Make sure any unused seat belt For example, infants and small ● Never hold an infant or child on that a child can reach is buckled, children left in a vehicle on a hot your lap. If you are not wearing a the lockable retractor is activated, day can die from heatstroke. A seat belt in a crash, you could be and the belt is fully retracted and child left alone with the key in the thrown forward and crush the locked. If a child wraps a loose ignition switch can accidentally set child against the dashboard or a seat belt around their neck, they the vehicle in motion, possibly seat-back. If you are wearing a seat can be seriously or fatally injured. injuring themselves or others. (See pages 45 and 46 for how to belt, the child can be torn from ● your arms and be seriously hurt or activate and deactivate the Lock all doors and the tailgate lockable retractor.) when your vehicle is not in use. killed. Children who play in vehicles can ● ● Never put a seat belt over yourself Use the childproof door locks to accidentally get trapped inside. and a child. During a crash, the prevent children from opening the Teach your children not to play in belt could press deep into the child rear doors. This can prevent or around vehicles. and cause serious or fatal injuries. children from accidentally falling out (see page 82). ● Keep vehicle keys/remote ● Never let two children use the transmitters out of the reach of same seat belt. If they do, they ● Do not leave children alone in a children. Even very young could be very seriously injured in a vehicle. Leaving children without children learn how to unlock crash. adult supervision is illegal in most vehicle doors, turn on the ignition states and Canadian provinces, and switch, and open the tailgate, can be very hazardous. which can lead to accidental injury or death.

38 2009 Fit Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed or a seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat. Safety Passenger and Driver Do not put a rear-facing child seat in a forward-facing position. If placed If the passenger's front airbag facing forward, an infant could be inflates, it can hit the back of the very seriously injured during a child seat with enough force to kill or frontal collision. seriously injure an infant. When properly installed, a rear- facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat as far back as Child Seat Type recommended, or from locking their An infant must be properly restrained seat-back in the desired position. in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the child reaches the seat It could also interfere with proper maker's weight or height limit for the operation of the passenger's seat, and the child is at least one year advanced front airbag system. old. Only a rear-facing child seat provides proper support for a baby's head, neck, and back.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 39 Protecting Infants and Small Children

In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small strongly recommend that you install child use the child seat until the child the child seat directly behind the reaches the weight or height limit for front passenger's seat, move the seat the seat. as far forward as needed, and leave it Child Seat Placement unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get We strongly recommend placing a a smaller rear-facing child seat. forward-facing child seat in a back seat, not the front. Placing a forward-facing child seat in Placing a rear-facing child seat the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger's airbag can be in the front seat can result in If the vehicle seat is too serious injury or death during a hazardous. far forward, or the child's head is collision. Child Seat Type thrown forward during a collision, an A child who is at least one year old, inflating airbag can strike the child Always place a rear-facing child and who fits within the child seat with enough force to cause very seat in the back seat, not the maker's weight and height limits, serious or fatal injuries. front. should be restrained in a forward- facing, upright child seat. Of the different seats available, we recommend those that have a five- point harness system as shown.

40 2009 Fit Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Even with advanced front airbags Selecting a Child Seat Whatever type of seat you choose, to that automatically turn the When buying a child seat, you need provide proper protection, a child passenger's front airbag off (see page to choose either a conventional child seat should meet three 31), a back seat is the safest place for seat, or one designed for use with requirements: a small child. the lower anchors and tethers for Safety Passenger and Driver 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or children (LATCH) system. If it is necessary to put a forward- Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety facing child seat in the front, move Conventional child seats must be Standard 213. Look for FMVSS the vehicle seat as far to the rear as secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box. possible, and be sure the child seat is whereas LATCH-compatible seats 2. The child seat should be of the firmly secured to the vehicle and the are secured by attaching the seat to proper type and size to fit the child. child is properly strapped in the seat. hardware built into the two outer Rear-facing for infants, forward- seating positions in the back seat. facing for small children. Since LATCH-compatible child seats 3. The child seat should fit the vehicle are easier to install and reduce the seating position (or positions) Placing a forward-facing child possibility of improper installation, where it will be used. seat in the front seat can result we recommend selecting this style. in serious injury or death if the Before purchasing a conventional front airbag inflates. In seating positions and vehicles not child seat, or using a previously equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- purchased one, we recommend that If you must place a forward- compatible child seat can be installed you test the seat in the specific facing child seat in front, move using a seat belt. vehicle seating position or positions the vehicle seat as far back as where the seat will be used. possible, and properly restrain the child.

2009 Fit 41 Installing a Child Seat

After selecting a proper child seat A child seat secured with a seat 3. Secure the child in the child seat. and a good place to install the seat, belt should be installed as firmly Make sure the child is properly there are three main steps in as possible. However, it does not strapped in the child seat installing the seat: need to be ‘‘ rock solid. ’’ Some according to the child seat maker's side-to-side movement can be instructions. A child who is not 1. Properly secure the child seat to expected and should not reduce properly secured in a child seat the vehicle. All child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap the child seat's effectiveness. can be seriously injured in a crash. part of a lap/shoulder belt or with If the child seat is not secure, try The following pages provide the LATCH (lower anchors and installing it in a different seating guidelines on how to properly install tethers for children) system. A position, or use a different style of a child seat. A forward-facing child child whose seat is not properly child seat that can be firmly seat is used in all examples, but the secured to the vehicle can be secured. instructions are the same for rear- endangered in a crash. facing child seats. 2. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured. After installing a child seat, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

42 2009 Fit Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH (lower anchors and tethers for children) at the outer rear seats. Safety Passenger and Driver The lower anchors are located between the seat-back and seat bottom, and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with LATCH. Rigid type The location of each lower anchor is LOWER ANCHORS indicated by a small button above the To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle anchor point. seat: seat, then attach the seat to the You can find lower anchors in the 1. Move the seat belt buckle or lower anchors according to the slits in the seat-backs. tongue away from the lower child seat maker's instructions. anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats 2. Make sure there are no objects have a rigid-type connector as near the anchors that could shown above. prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 43 Installing a Child Seat

ANCHOR

Flexible type TETHER STRAP HOOK Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page 6. Attach the tether strap hook to the have a flexible-type connector as 94), then route the tether strap anchor, then tighten the strap as shown above. through the legs of the head instructed by the child seat maker. restraint and over the seat-back, 4. Whatever type you have, follow the 7. Push and pull the child seat making sure the strap is not child seat maker's instructions for forward and from side-to-side to twisted. adjusting or tightening the fit. verify that it is secure.

44 2009 Fit Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/ Shoulder Belt When not using the LATCH system, all child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ Safety Passenger and Driver shoulder belt. In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions except the driver's have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat. If you intend to install a child seat in 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor, the center seating position of the rear seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the seat, make sure to push down the through the child seat according to belt all the way out until it stops, head restraint to the lowest position, the seat maker's instructions, then then let the belt feed back into the and make sure the detachable seat insert the latch plate into the retractor. belt is securely latched (see page buckle. 99). 3. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is not locked, and you will need to repeat these steps.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 45 Installing a Child Seat

To deactivate the lockable retractor and remove a child seat, unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let the belt fully retract.

4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these steps. To remove slack, it may help to put weight on the child seat, or push on the back of the seat while pulling up on the belt.

46 2009 Fit Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Using an Outer Anchor ANCHOR Tether ANCHOR A child seat with a tether can be installed in any seating position in the back seat. Safety Passenger and Driver Each rear outside seating position has an anchorage point on the seat- back, and the center seating position has an anchorage point in the ceiling near the tailgate. TETHER STRAP HOOK Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder belt 2. Attach the tether strap hook to the installation, we recommend using a 1. After properly securing the child anchor, making sure the tether tether whenever one is required or seat (see page 45), lift the head strap is not twisted. available. restraint, then route the tether 3. Tighten the strap according to the strap over the seat-back and seat maker's instructions. through the head restraint legs.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 47 ANCHOR 2009 Fit TETHER STRAP HOOK head restraint, then attach the tether strap hook to themaking anchor, sure the tether straptwisted. is not seat maker's instructions. 3. Route the tether strap over the 4. Tighten the strap according to the COVER ANCHOR lowest position. seat (see page 45 ), openanchor the cover.

Installing a Child Seat Using the Center Anchor 1. Lower the head restraint to its 2. After properly securing the child 48 Protecting Larger Children

When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit recommended weight or height limit for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger's front Safety Passenger and Driver belt. airbag inflates. The following pages give instructions If a child must ride in front, on how to check proper seat belt fit, move the vehicle seat as far what kind of booster seat to use if back as possible, use a booster one is needed, and important seat if needed, have the child precautions for a child who must sit sit up properly and wear the in front. seat belt properly. To determine if a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child, have the child put on the seat belt, then ask yourself: 1. Does the child sit all the way back against the seat? 2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat?

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 49 Protecting Larger Children

3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Some states and Canadian provinces between the child's neck and arm? also require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be possible, touching the child's sure to check current laws in the thighs? states or provinces where you intend 5. Will the child be able to stay to drive. seated like this for the whole trip? Booster seats can be high-back or If you answer yes to all these low-back. Whichever style you select, questions, the child is ready to wear make sure the booster seat meets the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If federal safety standards (see page you answer no to any question, the 35) and that you follow the booster child needs to ride on a booster seat. seat maker's instructions. A child who has outgrown a forward- facing child seat should ride in a back seat and use a booster seat until the lap/shoulder belt fits them properly without the booster.

50 2009 Fit Protecting Larger Children

If a child who uses a booster seat When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And must ride in front, move the vehicle Front while age may be one indicator of seat as far back as possible and be The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front, sure the child is wearing the seat belt Administration and Transport there are other important factors you properly. Canada recommend that all children should consider. Safety Passenger and Driver age 12 and under be properly A child may continue using a booster Physical Size restrained in a back seat. seat until the tops of their ears are Physically, a child must be large even with the top of the vehicle's or If the passenger's front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to booster's seat-back. A child of this inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 14 and 49). If height should be tall enough to use frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly, the lap/shoulder belt without a serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a booster seat. unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front. of position. Maturity A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must part of a larger child's body is in the be able to follow the rules, including path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride. injuries.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 51 Protecting Larger Children

If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions ● Do not put any accessories on a ride up front, be sure to: ● Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to across the neck. This could result improve a child's comfort or ● Carefully read the owner's manual, in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a and make sure you understand all crash. seat belt can make the belt less seat belt instructions and all safety effective and increase the chance information. ● Do not let a child put the shoulder part of a seat belt behind the back of serious injury in a crash. ● Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could cause most position. very serious injuries during a ● Have the child sit up straight, back crash. It also increases the chance against the seat, and feet on or that the child will slide under the near the floor. belt in a crash and be injured.

● Check that the child's seat belt is ● Two children should never use the properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a ● Supervise the child. Even mature crash. children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten the seat belts or sit properly.

52 2009 Fit Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Your vehicle's exhaust contains With the tailgate open, airflow can carbon monoxide gas. Carbon pull exhaust gas into your vehicle's monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill tailgate open, open all the windows Safety Passenger and Driver follow the information on this page. you. and set the heating and cooling system as shown below. Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running, even in an ● The vehicle is raised for an oil carbon monoxide. change. unconfined area, adjust the heating and cooling system as follows: ● You notice a change in the sound High levels of carbon monoxide can 1. Select the fresh air mode. of the exhaust. collect rapidly in enclosed areas, such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode. ● The vehicle was in an accident that engine with the garage door closed. may have damaged the underside. Even with the door open, run the 3. Turn the fan on high speed. engine only long enough to move the 4. Set the temperature control to a vehicle out of the garage. comfortable setting.

2009 Fit 53 Safety Labels

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully. If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact your dealer for a replacement. SUN VISORS U.S. models Canadian models

DASHBOARD U.S. models only

54 2009 Fit Safety Labels

HOOD RADIATOR CAP DOORJAMBS U.S. models U.S. models Canadian models rvradPsegrSafety Passenger and Driver

Canadian models

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 55 56 2009 Fit Instruments and Controls

This section gives information about Control Locations...... 58 Immobilizer System ...... 79 the controls and displays that Instrument Panel ...... 59 Ignition Switch...... 80 contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators...... 60 Door Locks ...... 81 your vehicle. All the essential Gauges...... 68 Power Door Locks ...... 81 controls are within easy reach. Trip Meter ...... 69 Childproof Door Locks...... 82

Current Fuel Mileage...... 70 Auto Door Locking/ Controls and Instruments Average Fuel Mileage...... 70 Unlocking ...... 83 Odometer...... 70 Auto Door Locking ...... 83 Fuel Gauge ...... 70 Auto Door Unlocking...... 85 Check Fuel Cap Indicator ...... 70 Tailgate...... 88 Maintenance Minder ...... 71 Remote Transmitter ...... 90 Controls Near the Steering Seats ...... 93 Wheel ...... 72 Power Windows ...... 100 Windshield Wipers and Mirrors ...... 101 Washers ...... 73 Parking Brake...... 102 Windshield Wipers ...... 73 Interior Convenience Items...... 104 Rear Window Wiper and Lower Glove Box ...... 105 Washer ...... 73 Upper Glove Box...... 105 Turn Signal and Headlights ...... 74 Beverage Holders ...... 106 Headlights ...... 75 Seat Under Box...... 106 Instrument Panel Brightness ...... 76 Accessory Power Socket ...... 106 Hazard Warning Button ...... 76 Sun Visor ...... 106 Rear Window Defogger...... 76 Interior Lights...... 107 Steering Wheel Adjustment ...... 77 Keys and Locks...... 78

2009 Fit 57 Control Locations

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 60) AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 115, 143) GAUGES (P. 68) NAVIGATION SYSTEMꭧ

MIRROR CONTROLS (P. 101)

USB ADAPTER CABLEꭧ (P. 130, 137, 171, 178) DOOR LOCK TAB (P. 81)

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCHꭧ (P. 81) HEATING/COOLING CONTROLSꭧ (P. 110) POWER WINDOW SWITCHES (P. 100)

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P. 200) (P. 219) MANUAL TRANSMISSION Vehicle with navigation system is shown. PARKING BRAKE (P. 102) (P. 217)

ꭧ: If equipped

58 2009 Fit Instrument Panel

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR (P. 65) LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P. 64) HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P. 65) CRUISE MAIN INDICATORꭧ (P. 65) SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATORꭧ (P. 66, 193) SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P. 31, 61) FOG LIGHT INDICATORꭧ (P. 64) ꭧ VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR (P. 64) SYSTEM INDICATORꭧ (P. 67) Controls and Instruments TPMS INDICATORꭧ (P. 64) VSA OFF INDICATORꭧ (P. 67) DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN ELECTRIC POWER INDICATOR (P. 62) STEERING (EPS) INDICATOR (P. 62) SEAT BELT REMINDER MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P. 60) INDICATOR (P. 66) WASHER LEVEL HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATORꭧ (P. 65) INDICATOR (P. 63)

MALFUNCTION LOW FUEL INDICATOR INDICATOR LAMP (P. 304) (P. 62) CHARGING SYSTEM CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P. 60, 303) INDICATORꭧ (P. 65) PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (P. 60, 305) LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P. 66) INDICATOR (P. 60, 303) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P. 63) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 30, 61) INDICATOR (P. 62) ꭧ: If equipped

2009 Fit 59 Instrument Panel Indicators

The instrument panel has many U.S. Canada Seat Belt Reminder indicators that give you important Parking Brake Indicator information about your vehicle. and Brake This indicator comes on when you System Indicator turn the ignition switch to the ON Malfunction Indicator (Red) Lamp (II) position. It reminds you and your This indicator has two functions: passengers to fasten your seat belts. See page 304. A beeper also sounds if you have not 1. It comes on when you turn the fastened your seat belt. Low Oil Pressure ignition switch to the ON (II) Indicator position. It is a reminder to check If you turn the ignition switch to the the parking brake. A beeper ON (II) position before fastening The engine can be severely damaged your seat belts, the beeper sounds, if this indicator flashes or stays on sounds if you drive with the parking brake not fully released. and the indicator flashes. If you do when the engine is running. For not fasten your seat belts before the more information, see page 303. Driving with the parking brake not fully released can damage the beeper stops, the indicator stops flashing but remains on. Charging System brakes and tires. Indicator 2. If it remains on after you have fully If this indicator comes on when the released the parking brake while engine is running, the battery is not the engine is running, or if it being charged. For more comes on while driving, there information, see page 303. could be a problem with the brake system. For more information, see page 305.

60 2009 Fit Instrument Panel Indicators

If your front passenger does not Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada fasten their seat belt, the indicator System Indicator Side Airbag Off comes on about 6 seconds after the This indicator comes on briefly when Indicator ignition switch is turned to the ON you turn the ignition switch to the (II) position. This indicator comes on briefly when ON (II) position. If it comes on at any you turn the ignition switch to the If either of you do not fasten your other time, it indicates a potential ON (II) position. If it comes on at any Controls and Instruments seat belt while driving, the beeper problem with your front airbags. This other time, it indicates that the will sound and the indicator will flash indicator will also alert you to a passenger's side airbag has again at regular intervals. For more potential problem with your side automatically shut off. For more information, see page 18. airbags, passenger's side airbag information, see page 31. cutoff system, side curtain airbags, automatic seat belt tensioners, driver's seat position sensor, or the front passenger's weight sensors. For more information, see page 30.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 61 Instrument Panel Indicators

Anti-lock Brake System Electric Power Steering Low Fuel Indicator (ABS) Indicator (EPS) Indicator This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on when This indicator comes on as a a few seconds when you turn the you turn the ignition switch to the ON reminder that you must refuel soon. (II) position and goes off after the ignition switch to the ON (II) When the indicator comes on, there position, and when the ignition engine starts. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the is about 1.64 US gal (6.2 L) of fuel switch is turned to the START (III) remaining in the tank before the position. If it comes on at any other electric power steering system. If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe needle reaches E. There is a small time, there is a problem with the reserve of fuel remaining in the tank ABS. If this happens, have your place and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. The when the needle does reach E. vehicle checked at a dealer. With this indicator will not turn off immediately. indicator on, your vehicle still has If it does not go off after driving a short Door and Tailgate Open normal braking ability but no anti- distance, or comes back on again while Indicator lock function. For more information, driving, take the vehicle to your dealer see page 231. This indicator comes on if any door to have it checked. With the indicator or the tailgate is not closed tightly. on, the EPS may be turned off, making the vehicle harder to steer. If you turn the steering wheel to the full left or right position repeatedly while stopping or driving at very low speed, you may feel slightly harder steering in order to prevent damage to the steering box caused by overheating.

62 2009 Fit Instrument Panel Indicators

High Temperature Low Temperature Turn Signal and Indicator Indicator Hazard Warning This indicator monitors the This indicator monitors the Indicators temperature of the engine coolant. It temperature of the engine coolant. If The left or right turn signal indicator normally comes on when you turn the there is no problem, this indicator blinks when you signal a lane change ignition switch to the ON (II) position comes on when the engine is cold. If or turn. If an indicator does not blink Controls and Instruments and goes off after a few seconds. In it comes on when the engine is warm or blinks rapidly, it usually means normal driving conditions, this (normal operating temperature), one of the turn signal bulbs is burned indicator should not blink or stay on. In have the vehicle inspected by your out (see page 264). Replace the bulb severe driving conditions, such as very dealer as soon as possible. as soon as possible, since other hot weather or a long period of uphill drivers cannot see that you are driving, this indicator may blink. This means the engine coolant temperature signaling. is high. If the indicator begins to blink When you press the hazard warning while you are driving, be sure to slow button, both turn signal indicators down to prevent overheating. If the and all turn signals on the outside of indicator stays on, pull safely to the the vehicle flash. side of the road and turn off the engine. See page 301 for instructions and precautions on checking the engine's cooling system. Do not drive the vehicle while the indicator is on or the engine may be damaged.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 63 Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Tire Pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring Lights On Indicator Indicator System (TPMS) Indicator U.S. models only U.S. models only This indicator reminds you that the This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for exterior lights are on. It comes on a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the when the light switch is in either the ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) or position. If you turn the position. If it comes on while driving, position. ignition switch to the ACCESSORY it indicates that one or more of your (I) or LOCK (0) position without vehicle's tires are significantly low on If this indicator comes on and stays turning off the light switch, this pressure. on at any other time, or if it does not indicator will stay on. A reminder come on when you turn the ignition chime will also sound when you open If this happens, pull to the side of the switch to the ON (II) position, there the driver's door. road when it is safe, check which tire is a problem with the TPMS. With has lost the pressure, and determine this indicator on, the low tire Fog Light Indicator the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, pressure indicator will not come on when a tire loses pressure. Take the replace the flat tire with the compact On Sport model spare (see page 284), and have the vehicle to your dealer to have the system checked. This indicator comes on when you flat tire repaired as soon as possible. turn on the fog lights. For more If two or more tires are underinflated, information, see page 75. call a professional towing service (see page 311). For more information, see page 235.

64 2009 Fit Instrument Panel Indicators

High Beam Indicator Cruise Main Indicator Washer Level Indicator

This indicator comes on with the On Sport model and Canadian LX model Canadian models only high beam headlights. For more This indicator comes on when you This indicator comes on when the information, see page 75. turn on the cruise control system by washer fluid level is low. Add washer

pressing the CRUISE button (see fluid when you see this indicator Controls and Instruments This indicator comes on with page 194). come on (see page 258). reduced brightness when the daytime running lights (DRL) are on Cruise Control Indicator (see page 75). Daytime Running Lights On Sport model and Canadian LX model Indicator This indicator comes on when you set the cruise control. See page 194 If this indicator comes on when the for information on operating the ignition switch is turned to the ON cruise control. (II) position and the parking brake is released, it means there is a problem in the circuit. Have your vehicle checked by your dealer.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 65 Instrument Panel Indicators

Maintenance Minder Immobilizer System Security System Indicator Indicator Indicator SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR This indicator comes on for a few This indicator comes on briefly when seconds when you turn the ignition you turn the ignition switch to the switch to the ON (II) position. It ON (II) position. It will go off if you reminds you that it is time to take have inserted a properly coded your vehicle in for scheduled ignition key. If it is not a properly maintenance. The maintenance main coded key, the indicator will blink, items and sub items will be displayed and the engine's fuel system will be in the information display. See page disabled (see page 79). 245 for more information on the maintenance minder. This indicator goes off when your dealer resets it after completing the On Sport model required maintenance service. This indicator comes on when the security system is set. See page 193 for more information on the security system.

66 2009 Fit Instrument Panel Indicators

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) VSA Off Indicator System Indicator

If equipped If equipped It comes on as a reminder that you This indicator normally comes on for have turned off the vehicle stability a few seconds when you turn the assist (VSA) system. Controls and Instruments ignition switch to the ON (II) This indicator normally comes on for position and when the ignition switch a few seconds when you turn the is turned to the START (III) position. ignition switch to the ON (II) It flashes when VSA is active (see position and when the ignition switch page 233). is turned to the START (III) position. See page 233 for more information If it comes on and stays on at any on the VSA system. other time, or if it does not come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, there is a problem with the VSA system. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. Without VSA, your vehicle still has normal driving ability, but will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. See page 233 for more information on the VSA system.

2009 Fit 67 Gauges

INFORMATION DISPLAY TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

ODOMETER/TRIP METER/CURRENT FUEL MILEAGE/ SELECT/RESET KNOB U.S. model is shown. AVERAGE FUEL MILEAGE/CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR

68 2009 Fit Gauges

Trip Meter CURRENT FUEL This meter shows the number of MILEAGE miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) ODOMETER TRIP METER AVERAGE FUEL ENGINE OIL LIFE driven since you last reset it. MILEAGE To reset a trip meter, display it, and then press and hold the select/reset Controls and Instruments knob until the number resets to ‘‘ 0.0 ’’. When you reset the trip meter, average fuel mileage is reset simultaneously.

The information display consists of To switch the display, press and two segments. The upper segment release the select/reset knob displays current fuel mileage, repeatedly. When you turn the maintenance item code(s), and the ignition switch to the ON (II) lower segment displays the trip position the last selection is meter, odometer, average fuel displayed. mileage, and engine oil life.

2009 Fit 69 Gauges

Current Fuel Mileage Odometer Check Fuel Cap Indicator This shows your current fuel mileage The odometer shows the total If the fuel fill cap is loose or missing, in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). distance your vehicle has been a ‘‘ CHECK FUEL CAP ’’ message driven. It measures miles in U.S. appears on the information display Average Fuel Mileage models and kilometers in Canadian after you start the engine. The This shows your vehicle's average models. It is illegal under U.S. message changes from CHECK, to fuel economy in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 federal law and Canadian provincial FUEL, to CAP repeatedly. km (Canada) since you last reset the regulations to disconnect, reset, or trip meter. Turn the engine off and confirm the alter the odometer with the intent to fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen When you reset a trip meter, the change the number of miles or the cap, then retighten it until it average fuel mileage for that trip kilometers indicated. clicks at least once. You can cycle the meter also resets. Fuel Gauge message off of the display by This shows how much fuel you have. pressing the select/reset knob It may show slightly more or less repeatedly, but this message will be than the actual amount. The needle displayed each time the engine is returns to the bottom after you turn started. It will take several days of off the ignition. normal driving for the vehicle to turn the warning off.

Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

70 2009 Fit Gauges

If the system still detects a loose or Maintenance Minder missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction The information display in the indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. Turn instrument panel shows you the the engine off, and check or engine oil life and maintenance retighten the fuel fill cap until it service items when the ignition

clicks at least once. The MIL goes switch is in the ON (II) position. This Controls and Instruments out after several days of normal information helps to keep you aware driving once the cap is tightened or of the periodic maintenance your replaced. If it does not go out, have vehicle needs for continued trouble- your dealer inspect the vehicle. For free driving. Refer to page 245 for more information, see page 304. more information.

2009 Fit 71 Controls Near the Steering Wheel

PADDLE SHIFTER (DOWNSHIFT)ꭧ 2 HORNꭧ 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL PADDLE SHIFTER WINDSHIELD (P. 224) BRIGHTNESS (UPSHIFT)ꭧ 2 WIPERS/WASHERS (P. 76) (P. 224) (P. 73)

HEADLIGHTS/ HAZARD WARNING TURN SIGNAL/ BUTTON FOG LIGHTSꭧ2 (P. 76) (P. 74) PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR REMOTE AUDIO (P. 31) CONTROL BUTTONSꭧ 2 (P. 189) REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTONꭧ2 NAVIGATION SYSTEM (P. 76/102) VOICE CONTROL BUTTONSꭧ 3 AUXILIARY INPUT JACK (P. 190)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCHꭧ 2 (P. 234) STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET ADJUSTMENTS BUTTONSꭧ 2 (P. 106) Vehicle with navigation system is shown. (P. 77) (P. 194)

ꭧ1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel. ꭧ2: If equipped. ꭧ3: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

72 2009 Fit Windshield Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wipers MIST － The wipers run at high Rear Window Wiper and Washer speed until you release the lever. OFF － The wipers are not activated. － The wipers operate every INT few seconds. ntuet n Controls and Instruments LO － The wipers run at low speed. HI － The wipers run at high speed. Windshield Pull the wiper control Washers － lever toward you, and hold it. The washers spray until you release 1. MIST the lever. The wipers 1. OFF run at low speed, then When you turn the wiper switch to 2. OFF complete one more the ‘‘ OFF ’’ position, the wiper will 3. INT － Intermittent sweep after you release return to its parked position. the lever. 4. LO － Low speed 2. Rotate the switch clockwise to turn the rear window wiper ON. 5. HI － High speed 3. Hold past ON to turn the rear 6. Windshield washers window wiper on and to spray the Push the right lever up or down to rear window washer. select a position.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 73 Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights

4. Hold past OFF to turn the rear Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal － Push down on the window wiper on and to spary the left lever to signal a left turn and up rear window washer. The rear to signal a right turn. To signal a lane window wiper makes one more change, push lightly on the lever and sweep after you release the switch. hold it. The lever will return to the center when you release it or When you shift the transmission to complete a turn. the reverse position with the front windshield wiper activated, the rear wiper operates automatically even if the rear wiper switch is off. The rear window washer uses the same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer. 1. Turn signal 2. Off 3. Parking and interior lights 4. Headlights 5. High beams 6. Flash high beams On Sport model 7. Fog lights off 8. Fog lights on

74 2009 Fit Headlights

Headlights － Turning the switch to High Beams － Push the lever Daytime Running Lights the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the forward and the high beam indicator With the headlight switch off or in parking lights, taillights, instrument will come on (see page 65). Pull it the position, the high beam panel lights, side-marker lights, and back to return to low beams. headlights and the high beam rear license plate lights. indicator come on with reduced To flash the high beams, pull the

brightness when you turn the Controls and Instruments Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ lever back lightly, then release it. ignition switch to the ON (II) position turns on the headlights. The high beams will stay on as long position and release the parking as you hold the lever back. When the light switch is in the brake. They remain on until you turn ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the lights Fog Lights the ignition switch off, even if you set on indicator comes on as a reminder. On Sport model the parking brake. This indicator stays on if you leave Turn the fog lights on and off by The headlights revert to normal the light switch on and turn the turning the switch next to the operation when you turn them on ignition switch to the ACCESSORY headlight switch. with the switch. (I) or the LOCK (0) position. You can use the fog lights only when If you leave the lights on with the key the headlights are on low beam.They removed from the ignition switch, will go off when the headlights are you will hear a reminder chime when turned off. you open the driver’s door.

2009 Fit 75 Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL KNOB You can change the instrument panel Push the button to turn on the The rear window defogger will clear brightness only when the ignition hazard warning lights (four-way fog, frost, and thin ice from the switch is in the ON (II) position and flashers). This causes all four outside window. Push the defogger button to the light switch is on. turn signals and both turn indicators turn it on and off. The indicator in the Turn the knob on the lower part of the in the instrument panel to flash. Use button comes on to show the instrument panel to adjust the the hazard warning lights if you need defogger is on. You must manually brightness. to park in a dangerous area near shut off the rear window defogger heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is when it is no longer needed. You will hear a beep when maximum disabled. or minimum brightness is reached. You will also hear a beep when the maximum level is canceled by turning the knob a click to the left.

76 2009 Fit Rear Window Defogger, Steering Wheel Adjustment

Make sure the rear window is clear Steering Wheel Adjustment and you have good visibility before Make any steering wheel adjustment starting to drive. before you start driving. The defogger wires on the inside of the rear window can be accidentally damaged. When cleaning the glass, Controls and Instruments always wipe side-to-side. Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may If equipped cause you to lose control of the Pushing this button also turns the vehicle and be seriously injured mirror heaters on or off. For more in a crash. information, see page 102. Adjust the steering wheel only 3. Push the lever forward fully to lock when the vehicle is stopped. the steering wheel in position. 4. Make sure you have securely 1. Pull the lever under the steering locked the steering wheel in place column toward you until it stops. by trying to move it up, down, in, and out. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and in or out, so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators.

2009 Fit 77 Protect the keys from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity. Do not drop the keysobjects or on set them. heavy Keep the keys away fromIf liquids. they get wet, dryimmediately them with a soft cloth. ● ● ●

You should have received anumber key tag with your keys.need You this will key number ifhave you to ever get a lostonly key Honda-approved replaced. key Use blanks. These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated byimmobilizer the system. They will not work to start the engineare if damaged. the circuits All models except Sport modelCanadian and LX model The keys do not containDo batteries. not try to take them apart. KEYS 2009 Fit KEY NUMBER TAG

All models except Sport modelCanadian and LX model KEYS WITH TRANSMITTER KEY NUMBER TAG

Keys and Locks On Sport model and Canadian LX model Your vehicle comes with theignition two keys. 78 Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC: your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the improperly coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the device) is used, the engine's fuel following two conditions: (1) This device Do not attempt to alter this system or system is disabled. may not cause harmful interference, and add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including Controls and Instruments the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle inoperable. interference that may cause undesired system indicator should come on operation. If you have lost your key and cannot briefly, then go off. If the indicator start the engine, contact your dealer. Changes or modifications not expressly starts to blink, it means the system approved by the party responsible for does not recognize the coding of the compliance could void the user's key. Turn the ignition switch to the authority to operate the equipment. LOCK (0) position, remove the key, reinsert it, and turn the ignition Always take the ignition key with you This device complies with Industry whenever you leave the vehicle alone. Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is switch to the ON (II) position again. subject to the following two conditions: The system may not recognize your (1) this device may not cause key's coding if another immobilizer interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause key or other metal object (i.e. key undesired operation of the device. fob) is near the ignition switch when you insert the key.

2009 Fit 79 Ignition Switch

ACCESSORY (I) － You can operate the audio system and the accessory power socket in this position. Removing the key from the ignition switch while driving ON (II) － This is the normal key locks the steering. This can position when driving. Several of the cause you to lose control of the indicators on the instrument panel vehicle. come on as a test when you turn the ignition switch from the Remove the key from the ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) ignition switch only when position. parked. START (III) － Use this position The ignition switch has four positions: only to start the engine. The switch LOCK (0), ACCESSORY (I), ON (II), returns to the ON (II) position when and START (III). you let go of the key. LOCK (0) － You can insert or remove You will hear a reminder beeper if the key only in this position. To turn you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or the key, push it in slightly. If your the ACCESSORY (I) position and vehicle has an automatic transmission, open the driver's door. Remove the the shift lever must also be in Park. key to turn off the beeper. If the front wheels are turned, the anti- If your vehicle has an automatic theft lock may make it difficult to turn the key. Firmly turn the steering wheel transmission, the shift lever must be to the left or right as you turn the key. in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch.

80 2009 Fit Door Locks

LOCK TAB When the door is unlocked, you can Power Door Locks To lock see the red indicator on the lock tab above the inner door handle. MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH ntuet n Controls and Instruments

UNLOCK To unlock

LOCK RED INDICATOR Each door has a lock tab next to the inside door handle. Pull the lock tab All models except Canadian DX and to lock the door, and push it forward DX-A models to unlock the door. All models except Sport model and To lock the doors and the tailgate, On Canadian DX and DX-A models Canadian LX model push the top of the master door lock To lock the passenger's door when Each front door can be locked or switch on the driver's door, pull the getting out of the vehicle, pull the unlocked with the ignition key. lock tab rearward on the driver's lock tab and close the door. To lock door, or use the key in the outside the driver's door, pull and hold the door lock on the driver's door. outside door handle, then pull the Pushing the bottom of the master lock tab. Release the handle, then door lock switch unlocks all doors close the door. and the tailgate.

CONTINUED 2009 Fit 81 Door Locks

The lock tab on each passenger's Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks door locks and unlocks only that If you forget and leave the key in the door. Pushing forward the lock tab ignition switch, lockout prevention LEVER on the driver's door unlocks only that will not allow you to lock the driver's door. To unlock only the driver's door. With any door open and the Unlock door from the outside, turn the key key in the ignition switch, locking and release it. If you turn it again, the with master door lock switch is remaining doors and the tailgate disabled. If the driver's door is Lock unlock. closed, the lock tab on the driver's door is not disabled. Pulling the To lock a passenger's door when driver's lock tab rearward will lock all getting out of the vehicle, pull the doors. If you try to lock an open lock tab rearward and close the door. driver's door by pulling the lock tab To lock the driver's door, remove rearward, the driver's door lock tab key from ignition switch and pull the pops out and unlocks the driver's The childproof door locks are lock tab rearward or push the top of door. designed to prevent children seated the master door lock switch, then in the rear from accidentally opening close the door. the rear doors. Each rear door has a lock lever near the edge. With the lever in the LOCK position (lever is down), the door cannot be opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. To open the door, pull the lock tab forward and use the outside door handle.

82 2009 Fit Instruments and Controls 83

CONTINUED Door Locks Park (P) position (A/T vehicles). (II) position, and open thedoor. driver's

To turn off the Automodes: Door Lock 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 2009 Fit The auto door locking is deactivated all the time. All doors and tailgate lock whenever you move the shiftout lever of the Park (P)vehicles). position (A/T All doors and tailgate lockthe when vehicle speed reaches 9(15 mph km/h). This is the default setting. ● ● ● Auto Door Locking The auto door locking featurethree has possible settings:

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking On all models except CanadianDX-A DX and Your vehicle has customizable settings for the doors andautomatically tailgate lock to and unlock. There are default settings for eachfeatures. of You these can turn offthe or settings change for these featuresdescribed as on the following pages. When you customize the setting, make sure your vehicle issafely, parked the engine is off,parking and brake. apply Make the all settings before you start driving. Door Locks

3. Push and hold the front of the To program the Park Lock mode: 3. Push and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the Locks all doors and tailgate when the master door lock switch on the driver's door until you hear a click shift lever is moved out of the Park (P) driver's door. You will hear a click. (after about 5 seconds). position (A/T vehicles only). Keep holding the switch until you hear another click (after about 5 4. Release the switch, and within 5 seconds). seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 4. Release the switch, and within 5 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the Park (P) position. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and make sure to close the driver's door.

84 2009 Fit Instruments and Controls 85

CONTINUED Door Locks the driver's door unlocks when you move thelever shift to the Park (P)This position. is the default setting. The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time. On A/T vehicles, All doors and tailgate unlockyou when move the shift leverPark to (P) the position (A/T vehicles). The driver's door unlocks whenever you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position. This is the default settingvehicles. on M/T All doors and tailgate unlock whenever you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position. ● ● ● ● ● Auto Door Unlocking The auto door unlocking featurefive has possible settings:

On push and hold the move the shift lever to 2009 Fit brake pedal, and move thelever shift out of the Park (P) position. master door lock switch ondriver's the door. You will hearKeep a holding click. the switch untilhear you another click (after aboutseconds). 5 seconds, turn the ignition switchthe to ACCESSORY (I) position. On A/T vehicles, A/T vehicles, the Park (P) position. LOCK (0) position. 4. Push and hold the front of the 5. Release the switch, and within 5 6. Turn the ignition switch to the 3. A/T models Park (P) position (A/T vehicles). (II) position, and make sureclose to the driver's door.

To program the Drive LockLocks mode: all doors and tailgatevehicle's when speed the reaches about 9km/h). mph (15 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON Door Locks

To turn off the Auto Door Unlock 4. Release the switch, and within 5 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON modes: seconds, turn the ignition switch to (II) position, and make sure to the LOCK (0) position. close the driver's door. To program the Park Unlock mode: 3. Push and hold the rear of the Unlocks the driver's door or all doors master door lock switch on the and tailgate when the shift lever is driver's door. You will hear a click. moved into the Park (P) position (A/T Continue to hold the switch: vehicles only). ● Until you hear another click (after about 5 seconds) to activate driver's door unlock feature.

● Or, until you hear two more clicks (after about 10 seconds) 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the to activate all doors and tailgate Park (P) position (A/T vehicles). unlock feature . 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 4. Release the switch, and within 5 (II) position, and open the driver's seconds, turn the ignition switch to door. the LOCK (0) position. 3. Push and hold the rear of the 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the master door lock switch on the Park (P) position. driver's door. You will hear a click, and after about 5 seconds, you will hear another click.

86 2009 Fit Door Locks

To program the Ignition Switch 3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold the Even if your vehicle's battery is Unlock mode: brake pedal, then move the shift removed or goes dead, the system Unlocks the driver's door or all doors lever out of the Park (P) position. keeps the auto door lock/unlock and tailgate when the ignition switch is setting which you selected. moved out of the ON (II) position. 4. Push and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver's door. You will hear a click. Controls and Instruments Continue to hold the switch:

● Until you hear another click (after about 5 seconds) to activate driver's door unlock feature.

● Or, until you hear two more clicks (after about 10 seconds) A/T models to activate all doors and tailgate unlock feature . 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the 5. Release the switch, and within 5 Park (P) position (A/T vehicles). seconds, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position. On 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON A/T vehicles, move the shift lever to (II) position, and make sure to the Park (P) position. close the driver's door. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

2009 Fit 87 HANDLE To open the tailgate, pullthen the lift handle, up. LOCK KEY UNLOCK 2009 Fit

All models except Sport modelCanadian and LX model You can lock or unlockwith the the tailgate key. The tailgate will lock oryou unlock lock when or unlock theby driver's using door the key, thedriver's lock door, tab the on master the doorswitch lock or the remote transmitterequipped). (if Tailgate All models except Canadian DXDX-A and models 88 Tailgate

Unlocking the Tailgate

Lock Unlock ntuet n Controls and Instruments

TAILGATE HANDLE

To close the tailgate, hold the tailgate Push the release lever to the right as handle, lower the tailgate, then press shown. On Sport model and Canadian LX model down on the back edge. If the power door lock system cannot If you need to unlock the tailgate Keep the tailgate closed at all times unlock the tailgate, unlock it manually, it means there is a while driving to avoid damaging the manually. problem with the tailgate. Have the tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas vehicle checked by your dealer. Place a cloth on the edge of the from getting into the interior. See cover, then use a small flat-tipped on page Carbon Monoxide Hazard screwdriver to remove the cover on 53. the back of the tailgate.

2009 Fit 89 Press this button for － about 2 seconds to attractthe attention: horn will sound, andlights the will exterior flash for aboutTo 30 cancel seconds. panic mode, pressother any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. PANIC Press this button once 2009 Fit － UNLOCK to unlock the driver's door.twice Push to it unlock the remainingand doors the tailgate. Some exteriorwill lights flash twice each timethe you button. press The ceiling light (if theswitch ceiling is light in the doorposition) activated will come on whenpress you the UNLOCK button. Ifnot you open do any door orwithin the 30 tailgate seconds, the lightout. fades If you relock thetailgate doors with and the the remote transmitter before 30 seconds have elapsed,light the will go off immediately. If you do not opentailgate any within door 30 or seconds, the theyautomatically will relock and the security system (if equipped) will set. LOCK BUTTON Press this button once to LED － PANIC BUTTON UNLOCK BUTTON LOCK lock all doors and theexterior tailgate. lights Some will flash once.you When push LOCK twice withinseconds, 5 the horn will soundthat to the verify doors and thelocked tailgate and are the security systemequipped) (if has set. You cannotthe lock doors and the tailgateor if the any tailgate door is notthe fully key closed is or in the ignition switch. Remote Transmitter On Sport model and Canadian LX model 90 Instruments and Controls 91

CONTINUED SCREW Remote Transmitter the transmitter with a small Phillips-head screwdriver. To replace the battery: 1. Remove the screw at the base of 2009 Fit Replacing the Transmitter Battery If it takes several pushesbutton on to the lock or unlockand the the doors tailgate, replace theas battery soon as possible. Battery type: CR1616 Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter. Protect the transmitter from extreme temperature. Do not immerse the transmitterany in liquid. If you lose a transmitter,replacement the needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer.

Remote Transmitter Care ● ● ● ● Remote Transmitter

BATTERY 4. Remove the old battery, and insert As required by the FCC: This device a new battery into the back of the complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. cover with the ＋ side facing down. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not An improperly disposed of battery cause harmful interference, and (2) this can hurt the environment. Always device must accept any interference confirm local regulations for received, including interference that may battery disposal. cause undesired operation. 5. Install the parts in reverse order. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 2. Separate the transmitter by prying This device complies with Industry its middle seam with your Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is fingernail. subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause 3. Inside the transmitter, separate the interference, and (2) this device must inner cover from the keypad by accept any interference that may cause carefully prying on the edge with a undesired operation of the device. coin.

92 2009 Fit Seats

Front Seat Adjustments See pag es 11 － 12for important safety information and warnings about how to properly position the seats and seat- backs.

Make all seat adjustments before you Controls and Instruments start driving.

To adjust the seat forward or To change the seat-back angle, pull backward, pull up on the bar under up the lever on the outside of the the seat cushion’s front edge. Move seat bottom. the seat to the desired position, and Once a seat is adjusted correctly, release the bar. Try to move the seat rock it back and forth to make sure it to make sure it is locked in position. is locked in position.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 93 Seats

Armrest Rear Seat Adjustments Head Restraints See page 13 for important safety information and a warning about improperly positioning head restraints. Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions to help protect you and your passengers from whiplash and other injuries.

RELEASE LEVER On Sport model and Canadian LX model You can adjust the angle of the rear The driver's seat has an armrest on seat-backs separately. To change the the side of the seat-back. To use, seat-back angle, pull up the release pivot it down. lever on the outer side of the seat- back.

They are most effective when you adjust them so the center of the back of the occupant's head rests against the center of the restraint.

94 2009 Fit Instruments and Controls 95 Seats

CONTINUED Failure to reinstall the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash. Always replace the head restraints before driving. When reinstalling a head restraint, put the legs back inadjust place. it Then to the appropriatewhile height pressig the release button. Make sure the head restraintposition locks when in you reinstall it. Removing the Head Restraint To remove a head restraintcleaning for or repair, pull itit up will as go. far Push as thethen release pull button, the restraint outback. of the seat- RELEASE BUTTON CUSHION 2009 Fit SEAT-BACK Rear Center Position LEGS When a passenger is seatedrear in center the seating position, the center head restraint should be adjusted up or down, topassenger's match height. the RELEASE BUTTON CUSHION SEAT-BACK Front LEGS

Adjusting the Head Restraint The head restraints adjust forYou height. need both hands torestraint. adjust Do a not attempt towhile adjust driving. it To raise it,upward. pull To lower the restraint,the push release button sideways, and push the restraint down. Do not hang any itemsrestraints, on or the from head the restraint legs. Do not place any objectan between occupant and the seat-back. Install each restraint in itslocation. proper Only use genuine Honda replacement head restraints. ● ● ● ● For a head restraint systemproperly: to work 2009 Fit After a collision, the activatedshould restraint return to its normal position. If the restraints do notnormal return position, to or their in thesevere event collision, of have a the vehicle inspected by a Honda dealer. ’ s head. It

Seats Active Head Restraints The driver's and front passenger's seats have active head restraints.vehicle If is the struck severely fromthe the occupant rear, properly secured withseat the belt will be pushedseat-back against and the the head restraintautomatically will move forward. This reduces the distance betweenrestraint the and the occupant also helps protect the occupants against whiplash and injuries toneck the and upper spine. 96 Seats

Folding the Rear Seat Up Folding the Rear Seat Down The left and right rear seat cushions LEG The rear seat-backs can be folded can be lifted up separately to make down for more cargo room. room for cargo. ꓈ Each side folds down separately, so Remove any items from the seat you can still carry a passenger in the ntuet n Controls and Instruments before you fold up the seat cushion. ꓇ rear outer seating position. Remove any items from the seat before folding down the seat-back. Make sure there are no items on the LATCH FLOOR GUIDE ꓉ floor before folding down the seats. ꓇ To return the seat cushion to its original position, first make sure ꓈ there are no items on the floor, then pull up the seat leg fully, and push down the seat cushion slowly while holding it with your hands. Set the seat leg in the floor guide. A latch Pull up the rear seat cushion, and comes out when the leg is set fold the seat leg down. Push the seat properly. cushion firmly against the seat-back to lock it.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 97 Seats

Do not put any heavy items on the seat-back when it is folded down. While lifting the seat-back, the seat cushion may come up with it. To secure the seat cushion, see page 97. Make sure the seat-back and seat cushion are locked securely and all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the rear seat-backs. In the LATCH PLATE center seating position of the rear RELEASE LEVER seat, be sure the detachable anchor When you fold down the driver's side 1. Lower the rear head restraints to is latched securely before using the rear seat, use the latch plate to its lowest position. If you fold seat belt (see page 99). release the center seat belt from the down the driver's side seat-back, Make sure all items in the cargo area detachable anchor (see page 99). also adjust the rear center head are secured. Loose items can fly Allow the seat belt to retract into the restraint to its lowest position. forward and cause injury if you have holder on the ceiling, and store the 2. Pull up the release lever on the to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo buckles in it. outside of the seat-back. on page 208). 3. Fold the seat-back forward.

98 2009 Fit Seats

Detachable Anchor LATCH PLATE SMALL LATCH PLATE The seat belt in the rear center seat is equipped with a detachable anchor. This allows the center seat belt to be unlatched when the driver's side rear ANCHOR Controls and Instruments seat is folded. BUCKLE

Using a seat belt with the SMALL LATCH PLATE TRIANGLE MARKS detachable anchor unlatched Pull out the small latch plate and the Line up the triangle marks on the increases the chance of serious latch plate from each holding slot in small latch plate and anchor buckle injury or death in a crash. the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt when reattaching the belt and to extend it. buckle. Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable Tug on the seat belt to verify that the anchor is correctly latched. detachable anchor is securely latched. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 99 Seats, Power Windows

ANCHOR Power Windows BUCKLE DRIVER'S WINDOW SWITCH Closing a power window on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

LATCH PLATE When you push the MAIN switch in, To unlatch the detachable anchor, MAIN SWITCH the switch is off, and the passenger insert the latch plate into the slot on Turn the ignition switch to the ON windows cannot be raised or the side of the anchor buckle. Store (II) position to raise or lower any lowered. To cancel this feature, push the detachable anchor and seat belt window. To open a window, push the on the switch again to get it to pop latch plates in the retractor housing. switch down and hold it. Release the out. Keep the MAIN switch off when switch when you want the window to you have children in the vehicle so stop. Pull back on the switch and they do not injure themselves by hold it to close the window. operating the windows unintentionally. The windows will operate for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch. Opening either front door cancels this function.

100 2009 Fit Power Windows, Mirrors

AUTO － To open or close the Mirrors Adjusting the Power Mirrors driver's window, push or pull the window switch firmly down or up to TAB SELECTOR SWITCH the second detent, and release it. The window will automatically go

down or up all the way. To stop the Controls and Instruments window, pull or push the window switch briefly. AUTO REVERSE － If the driver’s window senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the window, remove the ADJUSTMENT SWITCH obstacle, then use the window switch Keep the inside and outside mirrors 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON again. clean and adjusted for best visibility. (II) position. Auto reverse stops sensing when the Be sure to adjust the mirrors before 2. Move the selector switch to L window is almost closed. You should you start driving. (driver's side) or R (passenger's always check that all passengers and The inside mirror has day and night side). objects are away from the window positions. The night position reduces before closing it. glare from headlights behind you. Flip the tab on the bottom edge of the mirror to select the day or night position.

CONTINUED 2009 Fit 101 Mirrors, Parking Brake

3. Push the appropriate edge of the Heated Mirrors Parking Brake adjustment switch to move the mirror right, left, up, or down. 4. When you finish, move the selector switch to the center (off) position. This turns the adjustment switch off to keep your settings.

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON PARKING BRAKE LEVER On Canadian Sport and LX models To apply the parking brake, pull the The outside mirrors are heated to lever up fully. To release it, pull up remove fog and frost. With the slightly, push the button, and lower ignition switch in the ON (II) the lever. The parking brake position, turn on the heaters by indicator on the instrument panel pressing the button. The indicator in should go out when the parking the button comes on as a reminder. brake is fully released (see page 60). Press the button again to turn the heaters off. Pressing this button also turns the rear window defogger on and off.

102 2009 Fit Parking Brake

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes and axles. A beeper will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake on. Controls and Instruments

2009 Fit 103 Interior Convenience Items

COAT HOOK VANITY MIRRORS SUN VISOR SEAT-BACK POCKETꭧ 1 FRONT DOOR POCKET REAR SIDE POCKET (RIGHT SIDE) ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

UPPER GLOVE BOX

BEVERAGE HOLDER

LOWER GLOVE BOX CARGO FLOOR BOXꭧ 2 SEAT UNDER BOX BEVERAGE HOLDERS PASSENGER'S TRAY ꭧ1: If equipped ꭧ2: All Canadian models with automatic transmission CENTER POCKET

104 2009 Fit Interior Convenience Items

Lower Glove Box Upper Glove Box An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt. Controls and Instruments

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

Open the lower glove box by pulling Open the upper glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle. Close it up on the lever. Close it with a firm with a firm push. push.

2009 Fit 105 Interior Convenience Items

Beverage Holders Seat Under Box Accessory Power Socket This socket is intended to supply KNOB power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps). To use the accessory power socket, pull up the cover. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. It will not power an automotive type cigarette lighter element. Sun Visor SEAT UNDER BOX MARKS To use the sun visor, pull it down. Be careful when you are using the Pull up the driver's side rear seat When using the sun visor for the beverage holders. A spilled liquid cushion (see page 97). side window, remove the support rod that is very hot can scald you or your Open the seat under box by turning from the clip, and swing it out. passengers. Liquid can also spill the knob. Make sure you put the sun visor from the door pocket beverage To close the seat under box, turn the back in place when you are getting holders when you open or close the knob and align the marks. into or out of the vehicle. doors. Use only resealable containers in the door pockets. Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

106 2009 Fit Interior Lights

Ceiling Light After all doors are closed tightly, the light fades out in about 30 seconds. DOOR ACTIVATED ON The ceiling light (with the switch in the door activated position) comes on when you remove the key from the ignition switch. If you do not open a Controls and Instruments OFF door, the light fades out in about 30 seconds. If you leave any door open without the key in the ignition switch, the ceiling light will go off after 15 minutes. The ceiling light has a three-position switch: ON, Door Activated, and OFF. In the Door Activated (center) position, the light comes on when you:

● Open any door.

● Unlock the doors and the tailgate with the key or the remote transmitter (if equipped).

2009 Fit 107 108 2009 Fit Features

The heating and air conditioning Vents, Heating, and A/C...... 110 Disc Player Error Messages system in your vehicle provides a Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation comfortable driving environment in (Models without navigation system) ...... 157 all weather conditions. system) ...... 115 Playing a PC card (Models with Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)...... 158 The standard audio system has many navigation system)...... 122 Playing an iPod® (Models with features. This section describes Disc Player Error Messages navigation system)...... 170 those features and how to use them. Features (Models without navigation iPod® Error Messages (Models Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system) ...... 128 with navigation system) ...... 176 system that requires a code number Playing an iPod® (Models without Playing a USB Flash Memory to enable it. navigation system)...... 129 Device (Models with ® The security system helps to iPod Error Messages (Models navigation system) ...... 177 discourage vandalism and theft of without navigation system) ..... 135 USB Flash Memory Device Error your vehicle. Playing a USB Flash Memory Messages (Models with Device (Models without navigation system) ...... 183 navigation system) ...... 136 FM/AM Radio Reception...... 184 USB Flash Memory Device Error Protecting Your Discs ...... 186 Messages (Models without Remote Audio Controls...... 189 navigation system) ...... 142 Auxiliary Input Jack ...... 190 Playing the AM/FM Radio Radio Theft Protection ...... 191 (Models with navigation Setting the Clock...... 192 system) ...... 143 Security System ...... 193 Playing a Disc (Models with Cruise Control ...... 194 navigation system)...... 149

2009 Fit 109 Vents, Heating, and A/C

FAN CONTROL DIAL

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRRORS BUTTONꭧ

AIR CONDITIONING REAR WINDOW BUTTONꭧ DEFOGGER BUTTON TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

MODE CONTROL DIAL FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATION LEVER

ꭧ: If equipped

110 2009 Fit Vents, Heating, and A/C

Airflow Controls The outside air intakes for the Mode Control Dial heating and cooling system are at the Use the mode control dial to select Fan Control Dial Turn this dial to increase or decrease base of the windshield. Keep this the vents the air flows from. Some air the fan speed and airflow. area clear of leaves and other debris. will flow from the dashboard corner vents in all modes. The system should be left in fresh air Temperature Control Dial Turning this dial clockwise increases mode under almost all conditions. Air flows from the center and Keeping the system in recirculation corner vents in the dashboard. the temperature of the airflow. Features mode, particularly with the A/C off, Air Conditioning (A/C) Button can cause the windows to fog up. Airflow is divided between the If equipped vents in the dashboard and the floor This button turns the air Switch to recirculation mode when vents. driving through dusty or smoky conditioning on and off. The Air flows from the floor vents. indicator in the button is on when the conditions, then return to fresh air A/C is on. mode. Airflow is divided between the Fresh Air/Recirculation Lever Rear Window Defogger Button / floor vents and defroster vents at the This lever controls the source of the base of the windshield. air going into the system. When you This button turns the rear window Air flows from the defroster slide the lever to the side, air is defogger on and off (see page 76). vents at the base of the windshield. brought in from outside the vehicle On some models, this button also (fresh air mode). When you select operates the heated outside mirrors the side, air from the vehicle's (see page 102). interior is sent through the system again (recirculation mode).

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 111 Vents, Heating, and A/C

When you select or , the Using the Heater Using the A/C system automatically turns on the The heater uses engine coolant to If equipped A/C (if equipped). You cannot turn warm the air. If the engine is cold, it Air conditioning places an extra load the A/C off in this mode. will be several minutes before you on the engine. Check the high feel warm air coming from the temperature indicator (see page 63). Ventilation system. If the indicator begins to blink, turn The flow-through ventilation system off the A/C until the indicator goes draws in outside air, circulates it 1. Select and . off. through the interior, then discharges 2. Set the fan to the desired speed. it through vents near the tailgate. 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the 3. Adjust the warmth of the air with button. The indicator in the button 1. Set the temperature to the lower the temperature control dial. comes on when a fan speed is limit. selected. 2. Make sure the A/C is off. 2. Make sure the temperature is set 3. Select and . to maximum cool. 4. Set the fan to the desired speed. 3. Select . 4. If the outside air is humid, select recirculation mode. If the outside air is dry, select . 5. Set the fan to the desired speed.

112 2009 Fit Features 113 , the

CONTINUED or Vents, Heating, and A/C system automatically turns on the A/C. This helps to dehumidifyand the to air defog the windshield.mode, In you either cannot turn offWhen the you A/C. switch to anotherthe mode, A/C returns to itssetting, original either on or off,by as the indicated A/C indicator. When you select to help clear the by sliding the lever. . The system 2009 Fit / high for faster defrosting. automatically turns on the A/Cequipped). (if The A/C indicator will not come on if it was previously off. airflow feels warm. rear window. windshield, close the corner vents. To Defog and Defrost To remove fog from thewindows: inside of the 1. Set the fan to the desired speed or 2. Select 4. Adjust the temperature so the 5. Select 6. To increase airflow to the 3. Select you can . . and Adjust the temperature to your preference. equipped). cool it down more rapidlyopening by the partially windows, turning onA/C, the and setting the fanspeed to in maximum This setting is suitable forconditions all whenever driving the outside temperature is above 32°F (0°C). If the interior is very warm, Dehumidify the Interior Air conditioning, as it cools,moisture removes from the air. Whencombination used with in the heater, it makes the interior warm andcan dry prevent and the windows from fogging up. 1. Turn the fan on. 2. If the A/C is off, turn it on (if 3. Select Vents, Heating, and A/C

To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice To Turn Everything Off From the Windows Turning the fan speed control dial all 1. Set the fan and temperature the way to the left shuts the system controls to maximum level. off.

2. Select . The system ● Keep the system off for short automatically turns on the A/C (if periods only. equipped). The A/C indicator does ● To keep stale air and mustiness not come on if it was previously off. from collecting, you should have 3. Select . the fan running at all times. To clear the windows faster, you can close the dashboard corner vents by rotating each vent. This sends more warm air to the windshield defroster vents. Once the windshield is clear, select fresh air mode to avoid fogging the windows. For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

114 2009 Fit Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)

DISPLAY ꂹꂾBUTTON

VOL/SELECT Features KNOB POWER ( ꂻ ) BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

FM/AM BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTON TUNE/SEEK TUNE/SEEK ( ꀾ ( ꀽ SEEK) SEEK) BUTTON BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

SOUND ( ꂼ/ꂽ ) BUTTON SCAN BUTTON ꂺPLAY BUTTON

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 115 Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)

To Play the FM/AM Radio TUNE － Use the TUNE/SEEK SEEK － The SEEK function The ignition switch must be in the button to tune to a desired searches up and down from the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. frequency. Press the button to current frequency to find a station Turn the system on by pushing the tune to a higher frequency, and the with a strong signal. To activate it, FM/AM button. Adjust the volume button to tune to a lower press and hold the or side of by turning the VOL/SELECT knob. frequency. the TUNE/SEEK button until you hear a beep, then release it. The band and frequency that the You can also operate the tune radio was last tuned to are displayed. function by using the VOL/SELECT SCAN － The scan function samples To change bands, press the FM/AM knob. all stations with strong signals on the button. On the FM band, ST will be Press the VOL/ SELECT knob and selected band. To activate it, press displayed if the station is you will see ‘‘ SEL ’’ in the display. the SCAN button, then release it. broadcasting in stereo. Stereo Turn the knob right to tune to a You will see SCAN in the display. reproduction in AM is not available. higher frequency, or left to tune to a The system will scan for a station To Select a Station lower frequency. with a strong signal. When it finds You can use any of five methods to To turn it off, press the VOL/ one, it will stop and play that station find radio stations on the selected SELECT knob or button, or for about 10 seconds. band: tune, seek, scan, the preset ٕPLAY button. If you do nothing, the system will buttons, and auto select. The system will return to the normal then scan for the next strong station display about 10 seconds after you and play it for 10 seconds. When it stop adjusting the tune mode. plays a station you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again.

116 2009 Fit Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)

PRESET － Each preset button (1－ AUTO SELECT － If you are You will see a ‘‘ 0 ’’ displayed after 6) can store one frequency on AM, traveling far from home and can no pressing a preset button if auto select and two frequencies on FM. longer receive your preset stations, cannot find a strong station for that 1. Select the desired band, AM or you can use the auto select feature to preset button. find stations in the local area. FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store If you do not like the stations auto two frequencies with each preset Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘ A. SEL ’’ select has stored, you can store other button. flashes in the display, and the system frequencies on the preset buttons as goes into scan mode for several Features 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan previously described. seconds. It stores the frequencies of function to tune the radio to a To turn off auto select , press the A. six AM and twelve FM stations in the desired station. SEL (auto select) button. This preset buttons. restores the presets you originally 3. Pick a preset number (1－6), and set. hold it until you hear a beep. For information on FM/AM radio 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a frequencies and reception, see page total of six stations on AM and 184. twelve stations on FM.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 117 Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Radio Data System (RDS) If the station you are listening to is On the FM band, you can select a not an RDS station, the display favorite station and display the continues to show the frequency with program service name according to the PS name display function on. the information provided by the radio When you turn off this function by data system (RDS). pressing the TITLE button, the Program Service (PS) Name Display display shows ‘‘ RDS INFO OFF. ’’ The program service name display function shows the name of the PROGRAM SERVICE station you are listening to. With the NAME DISPLAY ON audio system on and the FM band selected, you can turn this function on or off. To switch the function between on and off, press and release the TITLE button. With the system on, you will see the ‘‘ RDS INFO ON ’’ message on the display. If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the displayed frequency switches to the station name.

118 2009 Fit Features 119

CONTINUED side of the PLAY button to ٕ or or select an RDS category. Theshows display the selected RDS category name for about 10 seconds.use You the can search or scanfind function radio to stations in theRDS selected category. If you dowhile nothing the RDS category namedisplayed, is the selected category is canceled. This function searches up anda down frequency for the strongestfrom signal the frequencies that carryselected the RDS category information. This can help you toyour find favorite a category. station To in activatepress it, the Press RDS Program Search TUNE/SEEK button. You will see the selected RDS category name blinking while searching it. When the system finds a station,selected the RDS category name willdisplayed be again for about 5 seconds. 2009 Fit ALL: All RDS category stations ROCK: Rock, classic rock androck soft music COUNTRY:Country music SOFT: Adult hits and softTOP music 40: Top 40 hits OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies R & B: Rhythm andrhythm blues, and and blues soft RELIGION: Religious music and religious talk CLASSIC: Classical music JAZZ: Jazz INFO: News, information, sports, talk, foreign language, personality, public, college, and weather TRAFFIC: Traffic information Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system) PLAY ٕ or RDS CATEGORY On the FM band selected,select you the can program category provided by the RDS. Press Radio Data System (RDS) Category button to display and selectcategory. an The RDS principal RDS categories are shown as follows; Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)

If the system does not find a station, RDS Program SCAN You can use the RDS program search ‘‘ NOTHING ’’ will be blinking for The scan function samples all or scan function even if the PS name about 5 seconds, then the system stations with strong signals on the display function is off. In this case, goes back to the last selected station. selected RDS category. To activate it, the display shows a frequency in press the SCAN button. You will see place of a PS name. ‘‘ SCAN ’’ in the display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal in the selected RDS category. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking while searching it. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again. If the system does not find a station, ‘‘ NOTHING ’’ will be blinking for about 5 seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.

120 2009 Fit Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Adjusting the Sound SVC － Adjusts the volume level Audio System Lighting Press the SOUND ( ) button to based on the vehicle speed. You can use the instrument panel select an appropriate setting: bass, brightness control knob to adjust the The system will return to the audio treble, fader, balance, and SVC illumination of the audio system (see display about 10 seconds after you (speed-sensitive volume page 76). The audio system stop adjusting a mode. compensation). Turn the VOL/ illuminates when the parking lights SELECT knob to adjust the setting. Speed-sensitive Volume are on, even if the system is turned

Compensation (SVC) off. Features BASS － Adjusts the bass. The SVC mode controls the volume TREBLE － Adjusts the treble. based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume FADER － Adjusts the front-to-back becomes. As you slow down, the strength of the sound. audio volume decreases. BALANCE － Adjusts the side-to- The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF, side strength of the sound. SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC Each mode is shown in the display as HIGH. Turn the VOL/SELECT knob it changes. Turn the VOL/SELECT to adjust the setting to your liking. If knob to adjust the setting to your you feel the sound is too loud, liking. When the level reaches the choose low. If you feel the sound is center, you will see ‘‘ C ’’ in the too quiet, choose high. display. This function is set to MID as the default setting when the vehicle leaves the factory.

2009 Fit 121 Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)

CD BUTTON ꂹꂾBUTTON DISC SLOT

DISC EJECT ( ꁎ ) BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON SEEK/SKIP SEEK/SKIP ( ꀾ ( ꀽ SEEK) SEEK) BUTTON BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON TITLE BUTTON VOL/SELECT KNOB ꂺPLAY BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON

122 2009 Fit Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)

To Play a Disc The in-dash disc player can also play NOTE: If a file on an MP3 or WMA To load or play discs, the ignition CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in disc is protected by digital rights switch must be in the ACCESSORY CD-TEXT, MP3, and WMA formats. management (DRM), the audio unit (I) or ON (II) position. When playing a disc in MP3 or displays UNSUPPORTED, and then WMA, you will see ‘‘ MP3 ’’ or skips to the next file. You operate the in-dash disc player ‘‘ WMA ’’ in the display. You can see with the same controls used for the If you have a disc that is a up to 99 folders, and select up to 999 radio. To select the disc player, press combination of CD-DA tracks and tracks/files. Features the CD button. You will see ‘‘ CD ’’ in MP3/WMA files, you can choose the the display. The folder or track format to listen by pressing the CD numbers are shown in the display. button. You can also select the displayed Video CDs and DVDs will not work information with the TITLE button in this unit. (see page 123). The system will continuously play a disc until you A disc compressed in AAC format change modes. cannot be played in this audio system.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 123 Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)

The specifications of the compatible To Load a Disc You can see the album, artist, and MP3 file are: Insert a disc about halfway into the track name in the display. If a disc is Sampling frequency: disc slot. The drive will pull the disc recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 24/ in the rest of the way to play it. You see the folder and file name, and the 22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) operate the disc player with the same artist, album, and track tag. Bit rate: controls used for the radio. The With the folder name, you will see 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ number of the current track is shown the FOLDER indicator in the display. 160/192/224/256/320 kbps in the display. When playing a disc in The TRACK indicator is shown with (MPEG1), MP3 or WMA, the numbers of the the file or track name. 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ current folder and file are shown. 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) The system will continuously play a When you press the TITLE button Compatible with variable bit rate and disc until you change modes. while a disc without text data is ‘‘ ’’ multi-session. You cannot load and play 3-inch (8- playing, you will see NO INFO on Maximum layers (including ROOT): cm) discs in this unit. the display. 8 layers For information on how to handle The display shows up to about 16 The specifications of the compatible and protect compact discs, see page characters of selected text data (the WMA file are: 186. folder name, file name, etc.). Sampling frequency: Text Data Display Function If the text data has more than 16 32/44.1/48 kHz Each time you press the TITLE characters, you will see the first 15 Bit rate: button, the display shows you the characters and the indicator on the 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps text data on a disc, if the disc was display. Press and hold the TITLE Compatible with variable bit rate and recorded with text data. button until the next 16 characters multi-session. are shown. You can see up to about Maximum layers (including ROOT): 31 characters of the text data. 8 layers

124 2009 Fit Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)

If you press and hold the TITLE When you turn on the audio system SEEK/SKIP － Each time you press button again, the display shows the next time, the system keeps your the button, the player skips first 15 characters again. selection with the TITLE button. forward to the beginning of the next If any letter is not available, it is To Change or Select Tracks/Files track (files in MP3/WMA mode). replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the You can use the SEEK/SKIP button Press the button to skip display. When the disc has no text while a disc is playing to select backward to the beginning of the data, you will see ‘‘ NO INFO ’’ on passages and change tracks (files in current track. Press it again to skip to the display. MP3/WMA mode). the beginning of the previous track. Features You will also see some text data In MP3/WMA mode, use the To move rapidly within a track, press .under these conditions: or ٕPLAY button to select folders in and hold the or button the disc, and use the SEEK/SKIP ● You can also operate the track When a new folder, file, or track is button to change files. selected. selection by using the VOL/SELECT knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob ● When you change the audio mode and you will see ‘‘ SEL ’’ in the to play a disc with text data or in display. Turn the knob to switch the MP3 or WMA. track number. Press the VOL/ When you insert a disc, and the SELECT knob or ٕPLAY button to ● system begins to play. set your selection. To turn it off, press the buttton. When playing a CD-DA with text data, the album and track name are shown in the display.With a disc in MP3 or WMA, the display shows the folder and file name.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 125 ’’ F-RDM ‘‘ This － feature, when activated, plays the files in the current folderorder, in rather random than in theare order compressed they in MP3/WMA. To activate folder random play, pressRDM the button. You will see FOLDER-RANDOM In MP3/WMA mode in the display. The systemselect will and then play files randomly.continues This until you deactivate folder random play by pressing andthe holding RDM button. Each time you press thebutton, RDM the mode changes from folder random play, to withinrandom a play, disc then to normal play. This feature, － in the display. The 2009 Fit ’’ in the display. Press and ’’ F-RPT ‘‘ This feature plays the tracks RDM system continuously replays the current folder. Press and holdRPT the button to turn it off. Each time you press thethe RPT mode button, changes from filefolder repeat repeat, to then to normal playing. RANDOM (Random within a disc) － within a disc in randomMP3/WMA order. mode, In all files infolders all are played in randomTo order. activate random mode, pressRDM the button repeatedly until you‘‘ see FOLDER-REPEAT when activated, replays all theon files the selected folder inthey the are order compressed in MP3/WMA. To activate folder repeat mode,the press RPT button repeatedly untilsee you In MP3/WMA mode hold the RDM button to turn it off. or in ’’ To select RPT ‘‘ － in the display. Turn the knob button repeatedly. ’’ PLAY button to skip to the ٕ To continuously replay a track PLAY button. Press the SEL the display. Press and holdbutton the to RPT turn it off. REPEAT (TRACK/FILE REPEAT) － (file in MP3/WMA mode), pressRPT the button. You will see Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system) FOLDER SELECTION ٕ button to skip to thethe next folder, and 126 a different folder, press the previous folder. You can also operate thefile folder selection and by using theSELECT VOL/ knob. Press the VOL/ SELECT knob and you will‘‘ see In MP3/WMA mode to switch the folder numberpress and the knob to setTurn your the selection. knob to switchnumber the and file press the knobselection. to To your turn it off, press the Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)

SCAN － The scan function samples In MP3/WMA mode To Stop Playing a Disc all the tracks on the disc in the order Press the eject button ( )to － This feature, they are recorded on the disc (all FOLDER-SCAN remove the disc. If you eject the disc, when activated, samples the first file files in the selected folder in MP3 or but do not remove it from the slot, in each folder on the disc in the WMA mode). To activate the scan the system will automatically reload order they are recorded. To activate feature, press the SCAN button. You it after 10 seconds and put it in pause the folder scan feature, press the will see ‘‘ SCAN ’’ in the display. You mode. To begin playing, press the SCAN button repeatedly. You will will get a 10 second sampling of each CD button. Features see ‘‘ F-SCAN ’’ in the display. The track/file in the disc/folder. Press system will then play the first file in Press the FM/AM button to switch and hold the SCAN button to get out the main folders for about 10 to the radio while a disc is playing. of scan mode and play the last track seconds. If you do nothing, the Press the CD button to play the disc. sampled. system will then play the following If you turn the system off while a disc first files for 10 seconds each. When is playing, either with the power ( ) the system samples the first file of all button or by turning off the ignition folders, F-SCAN is cancelled, and the switch, the disc will stay in the drive. system plays normally. When you turn the system back on, Each time you press the SCAN the disc will begin playing where it button, the mode changes from left off. track/file scan to folder scan, then to Protecting Discs normal playing. For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see page 186.

2009 Fit 127 Disc Player Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

The chart on the right explains the Error error messages you may see in the Cause Solution Message display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in the Will disappear when the temperature returns to High Temperature display while playing a disc, press HEAT ERROR normal. the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next supported deformation. If there is no damage, UNSUPPORTED supported track or file plays automatically. insert the disc again. For the additional information on damaged BAD DISC Mechanical Error Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc. discs, see page 187. PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of OWNERS deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt MANUAL PUSH (see page 187). Insert the disc again. If the code The audio system will try to play the EJECT does not disappear, or the disc cannot be disc. If there is still a problem, the removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force error message will reappear. Press the disc out of the player. BAD DISC Servo Error the eject button, and pull out the PLEASE CHECK disc. OWNERS MANUAL Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the BAD DISC DISC Error Check the disc for serious damage, signs of first disc. If the error message cycle PLEASE CHECK deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt repeats and you cannot clear it, take OWNERS (see page 187). your vehicle to a dealer. MANUAL

128 2009 Fit Playing an iPod® (Models without navigation system)

On Sport model USB INDICATOR iPod INDICATOR ꂹꂾBUTTON AUX BUTTON Features

POWER ( ꂻ ) BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON ꀾ ꀽ SEEK SEEK (SKIP －) (SKIP ＋) BUTTON BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON VOL/SELECT KNOB ꂺPLAY BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 129 Playing an iPod® (Models without navigation system)

ꭂ ꭧ To Play an iPod Model Firmware ● Do not use an extension cable This audio system can operate the iPod 5G Ver. 1.2 or more between the USB adapter cable audio files on the iPodꭂ with the iPod classic Ver. 1.0 or more equipped with your vehicle and same controls used for the in-dash iPod nano Ver. 1.2 or more your dock connector. disc player. To play an iPod, connect iPod nano 2nd Ver. 1.1.2 or more ● We recommend backing up your it to the USB adapter cable in the generation data before playing it. upper glove box by using your dock iPod nano 3rd Ver. 1.0 or more connector, then press the AUX generation In AAC format, DRM (digital rights button. The ignition switch must be iPod touch Ver. 1.1.1 or more management) files cannot be played. in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) iPhone Ver. 1.1.1 or more If the system finds a DRM file, the position. The iPod will also be ꭧ : Use the latest firmware. audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE, recharged with the ignition switch in and then skips to the next file. these positions. Use only compatible iPods with the latest firmware. iPods that are not The audio system reads and plays compatible will not work in this audio sound files to be playable on the unit. iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device. The NOTE: system will only play songs stored on ● Do not connect your iPod using a the iPod with iTunes. HUB.

iPod and iTunes are registered ● Do not keep the iPod in the trademarks owned by Apple Inc. vehicle. Direct sunlight and high iPods that are compatible with your heat will damage it. audio system are listed below.

130 2009 Fit Features ꭧ 131

CONTINUED OK to disconnect. s audio unit. ’ : It may take a few minutes for the Sample Display When the iPod is connectediPod and mode the is selected ondisplay, the the audio USB and iPodare indicators shown in the display.loading, After you will see Hondaon mark the iPod. That meansonly you operate can your iPod usingvehicle the ꭧ Honda mark to display onthe the display iPod. does If not change,function this is not supported oniPod your model or firmware. (Models without navigation system) ® 2009 Fit USB CONNECTOR Playing an iPod the iPod correctly and securely. USB connector securely. DOCK CONNECTOR 2. Connect your dock connector to 3. Install the dock connector to the USB ADAPTER CABLE USB CONNECTOR out the USB adapter cable.

Connecting an iPod 1. Open the upper glove box, and pull Playing an iPod® (Models without navigation system)

If the audio system still does not Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Files recognize the iPod, the iPod may Each time you press the TITLE Use the SKIP button while an iPod is need to be reset. Follow the button the display mode switches playing to select passages and instructions that came with your between the album name, the song change files. name, the artist name, or name off iPod, or you can find reset SKIP － Each time you press the instructions online at (which turns off the text display). www.apple.com/ (SKIP +) button, the system skips ipod. The display shows up to about 16 forward to the beginning of the next characters of the selected data. If the file. Press the (SKIP －) button, text data has more than 16 to skip backward to the beginning of characters, you will see the first 15 the current file. Press it again to skip characters and the indicator in the to the beginning of the previous file. display. Press and hold the TITLE button until the next 16 characters To move rapidly within a file, press are shown. and hold either side ( or )of the SKIP button.

132 2009 Fit Playing an iPod® (Models without navigation system)

The display shows items on the To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode: selected list. Turn the VOL/SELECT You can select any type of repeat and knob to select an item, then press the shuffle mode by using the RPT VOL/SELECT knob to set your button or the RDM button. selection. － Press the VOL/ REPEAT This feature SELECT knob. If you select ‘‘ ALL, ’’ all available files continuously plays a file. To activate on the selected list are played. the repeat feature, press the RPT button. You will see ‘‘ RPT ’’ in the Features Pressing the button goes back display. To turn it off, press the RPT to the previous display and pressing button again. the TITLE button cancels this setting mode. SHUFFLE ALL － This feature You can also select a file from any list plays all available files in a selected on the iPod menu: playlists, artists, list (playlists, artists, albums or albums and songs, by using the songs) in random order. To activate VOL/SELECT knob. Push the VOL/ the shuffle all feature, press the RDM SELECT knob to switch the display button. You will see ‘‘ RDM ’’ in the to an iPod menu, then turn the VOL/ display. To turn it off, press and hold SELECT knob to select a desired list. the RDM button. Press the VOL/SELECT knob to set your selection.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 133 Playing an iPod® (Models without navigation system)

SHUFFLE ALBUM － This feature To Stop Playing Your iPod When you disconnect the iPod while plays all available albums in a To play the radio when an iPod is it is playing, the display shows ‘‘ USB selected list (playlists, artists, albums playing, press the FM/AM button. If NO DATA. ’’ or songs) in random order. The files a disc is in the audio unit, press the iPod Error Messages in each album are played in the CD button to play the disc. If you see an error message in the recorded order. To activate the Disconnecting an iPod display, see page 135 . shuffle album feature, press the You can disconnect the iPod at any RDM button repeatedly. You will see ‘‘ ‘‘ ’’ time when you see OK to F-RDM in the display. To turn it Disconnect ’’ messageꭧ in the iPod off, press and hold the RDM button. display. Always make sure you see Each time you press the RDM ‘‘ OK to Disconnect ’’ message in the button, the mode changes from iPod display before you disconnect it. shuffle all play to shuffle album play, Make sure to follow the iPod’s then to normal playing. instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable. ꭧ : The displayed message may vary on models or versions. On some models, there is no message to disconnect. If you reconnect the same iPod, the system may begin playing where it left off, depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected.

134 2009 Fit iPod® Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

If you see an error message on the Error audio display while playing an iPod, Solution Message find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your UNPLAYABLE The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. There is a FILE possibility that the files have been damaged. dealer.

UNSUPPORTED

Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted. Features VER.

2009 Fit 135 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

On Sport model USB INDICATOR ꂹꂾBUTTON AUX BUTTON

POWER ( ꂻ ) BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON ꀾ ꀽ SEEK SEEK (SKIP －) (SKIP ＋) BUTTON BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON VOL/SELECT KNOB ꂺPLAY BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON

136 2009 Fit Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

To Play a USB Flash Memory The recommended USB flash ● We recommend backing up your Device memory devices are 256 Mbyte or data before playing a USB flash This audio system can operate the higher. Some digital audio players memory device. audio files on a USB flash memory may be compatible as well. ● Depending on the type and device with the same controls used Some USB flash memory device number of files, it may take some for the in-dash disc player. To play a (such as devices with security time before they begin to play. USB flash memory device, connect it lockout features, etc.) will not work ● to the USB adapter cable in the Depending on the software the Features in this audio unit. upper glove box, then press the AUX files were made with, it may not be button. The ignition switch must be NOTE: possible to play some files, or in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) display some text data. ● Do not use a device such as a card position. reader or hard drive as the device The specifications for compatible The audio system reads and plays or your files may be damaged. MP3 files are: the audio files on the USB flash ● Do not connect your USB flash – Sampling frequency: memory device in MP3, WMA or ꭧ memory device using a HUB. 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) AAC formats. Depending on the 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2) format, the display shows MP3, ● Do not use an extension cable to WMA or AAC when a USB flash the USB adapter cable equipped – Bit rate: memory device is playing. The USB with your vehicle. 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ flash memory device limit is up to 160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps ● Do not keep the USB flash (MPEG1) 700 folders or up to 65535 files. memory device in the vehicle. 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ ꭧ Direct sunlight and high heat will : Only AAC format files recorded 112/128/144/160/VBR kbps damage it. with iTunes are playable on this (MPEG2) audio unit.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 137 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

– Supported standards: – Bit rate: Connecting a USB Flash Memory MPEG1 Audio Layer3 8 － 320 kbps Device MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3 – Supported standards: USB CONNECTOR – Partition: Top partition only MPEG4/AAC LC MPEG2/AAC LC – Maximum layers: 8 – Partition: Top partition only The specifications for compatible WMA files are: – Maximum layers: 8 – Sampling frequency: Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or 32/44.1/48 kHz AAC format, a file with unsupported version cannot be played. If the – Bit rate: system finds it, the audio unit 48 － 320/VBR kbps (Max 384) displays UNSUPPORTED, and then USB ADAPTER CABLE – Supported standards: skips to the next file. WMA version 7/8/9 1. Open the upper glove box, and pull In WMA or AAC format, DRM out the USB adapter cable. – Partition: Top partition only (digital rights management) files – Maximum layers: 8 cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays The specifications for compatible UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips AAC files are: to the next file. – Sampling frequency: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/ 44.1/48 kHz

138 2009 Fit Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Files Each time you press the TITLE Use the SKIP button while a USB button, the display mode shows you flash memory device is playing to in sequence, the folder name, the file select passages and change files. name, the artist name, the album － name, the song name, or name off SKIP Each time you press the (which turns off the text display). (SKIP +) button, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next The display shows up to about 16 file. Press the (SKIP －) button, Features characters of the selected data. If the to skip backward to the beginning of text data has more than 16 the current file. Press it again to skip USB CONNECTOR characters, you will see the first 15 to the beginning of the previous file. characters and the indicator in the 2. Connect the USB flash memory display. Press and hold the TITLE To move rapidly within a file, press device to the USB connector button until the next 16 characters and hold either side ( or )of correctly and securely. are shown. the SKIP button. When the USB flash memory device FOLDER SELECTION － To select is connected, the USB indicator is a different folder, press the shown in the display. button or ٕPLAY button. Press the button to skip to the next folder, and press the ٕPLAY button to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 139 in ’’ RDM ‘‘ This feature － This feature plays all － in the display. To turn it ’’ F-RDM RANDOM the files in random order.the To track activate random feature, pressRDM the button. You will see plays the files in thein selected random folder order. To activatefolder the random feature, press the RDM button repeatedly. You will‘‘ see the display. To turn ithold off, the press RDM and button. FOLDER RANDOM off, press and hold the RDM button. Each time you press thebutton, RDM the mode changes fromrandom track play to folder randomthen play, to normal playing. in the ’’ This feature RPT ‘‘ － in the display. To ’’ This feature 2009 Fit － F-RPT ‘‘ You can select any typerandom of and repeat, scan modes byRPT using button the or RDM button,button. or SCAN REPEAT continuously plays a file. Tothe activate repeat feature, press thebutton. RPT You will see display. To turn it off,the press RPT and button. hold FOLDER REPEAT replays all the files infolder the in selected the order theyTo are activate stored. the folder repeatpress feature, the RPT button repeatedly.will You see To Select Repeat, Random orMode: Scan turn it off, press andbutton. hold the RPT Each time you press thethe RPT mode button, changes from filefolder repeat repeat, to then to normal playing. Press the VOL/ SELECT knob. button goes back Track Selection Folder Selection to the previous display andthe pressing TITLE button cancels thismode. setting Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigationTo system) Select a File fromLists Folder and File You can also select ausing folder the or VOL/SELECT file knob. by Push the VOL/SELECT knob to switchdisplay the to the folder orturn file the list, VOL/SELECT then knob to select a folder or file.SELECT Press knob the to VOL/ set your selection. Pressing the 140 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

SCAN － This feature samples all To Stop Playing a USB Flash USB Flash Memory Device Error files in the selected folder in the Memory Device Messages order they are stored. To activate the To play the radio when a USB flash If you see an error message in the scan feature, press the SCAN button. memory device is playing, press the display, see page 142 . You will see ‘‘ SCAN ’’ in the display. FM/AM button. If a disc is in the You will get a 10 second sampling of audio unit, press the CD button to each file in the folder. Press and hold play the disc. the SCAN button to get out of the Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory Features scan mode and play the last file Device sampled. You can disconnect the USB flash FOLDER SCAN－ This feature memory device in any time even if samples the first file in each folder in the USB mode is selected on the the order they are stored. To activate audio system. Always follow the USB the folder scan feature, press the flash memory device’s instructions SCAN button repeatedly. You will when you remove it. see ‘‘ F-SCAN ’’ in the display. You When you disconnect the USB flash will get a 10 second sampling of each memory device while it is playing, first file in the folder(s). Press and the display shows hold the SCAN button to get out of ‘‘ USB NO DATA. ’’ the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled. If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device, the system will Each time you press the SCAN begin playing where it left off. button, the mode changes from file scan to folder scan, then to normal playing.

2009 Fit 141 USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

If you see an error message on the Error audio display while playing a USB Solution Message flash memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, UNPLAYABLE The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory FILE device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged. take your vehicle to your dealer.

UNSUPPORTED Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.

142 2009 Fit Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

POWER/VOLUME KNOB FM1 ICON AM ICON SOUND ICON FM2 ICON AUTO SELECT ICON BACK GROUND ICON Features

AM/FM BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

PRESET BUTTONS CONTINUED

2009 Fit 143 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Voice Control System You can also operate the audio To Select a Station In addition to the standard audio system without using the control You can use any of five methods to controls, the audio system in your icons on the audio screen. Use the find radio stations on the selected vehicle can be operated using the control buttons on the left side of the band: tune, seek, scan, the preset voice control system. See the screen. The status bar appears on the buttons, and auto select. navigation section in your quick start bottom of the screen each time you － Use the TUNE bar to tune guide for an overview of this system, operate any of the control buttons. TUNE the radio to a desired frequency. and the navigation system manual for On the navigation screen, you can complete details. also see audio information by Press the ً side of the bar to tune to ٕ touching the AUDIO INFO icon on a higher frequency, and press the To Play the AM/FM Radio side to tune to a lower frequency. The ignition switch must be in the the lower of the screen. ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. The band and frequency that the Press and hold the ً or ٕ side of Turn the system on by pushing the radio was last turned to are the TUNE bar until you hear two power/volume knob or the AM/FM displayed. To change bands, press beeps to change the frequency button. Adjust the volume by turning the AM/FM button, or touch the rapidly. Release the bar when the the power/volume knob. desired band icon (FM1, FM2, or display reaches the desired frequency. Pushing the AUDIO button will also AM). On the FM band, STEREO will turn on the system. be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on AM is not available.

144 2009 Fit Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

SEEK － The SEEK function If you do nothing, the system will Each preset button's frequency is searches up and down from the then scan for the next strong station shown on the bottom of the audio current frequency to find a station and play it for 10 seconds. When it display. with a strong signal. To activate it, plays a station you want to listen to, .press and hold the ً or ٕ side of press the SCAN button again the TUNE bar until you hear a beep, Preset － Each preset button can then release it. store one frequency on AM and two SCAN － The SCAN function frequencies on FM. Features samples all stations with strong 1. Select the desired band, AM or signals on the selected band. To FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store activate it, press the SCAN button, two frequencies with each preset then release it. You will see SCAN in button. the display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal. When 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan it finds one, it will stop and play that function to tune the radio to a station for about 10 seconds. desired station. 3. Pick a preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 145 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

AUTO SELECT － If you are You will see a ‘‘ 0 ’’ displayed after Adjusting the Sound traveling far from home and can no pressing a preset button if auto select longer receive your preset stations, cannot find a strong station for every you can use the auto select feature to preset button. find stations in the local area. If you do not like the stations auto Press the AUDIO button to view the select has stored, you can store other audio control icons, then touch the frequencies on the preset buttons as AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO previously described. SEL flashing in the display, and the To turn off auto select , touch the system goes into scan mode for AUTO SEL icon . This restores the several seconds. It stores the presets you originally set. frequencies of six AM, and twelve SOUND ICON FM stations in the preset buttons. For information on FM/AM radio frequencies and reception, see page You can adjust the sound on the 184. navigation screen. To adjust the sound, push the AUDIO button, then enter the sound grid by touching the SOUND icon on the display.

146 2009 Fit Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

FADER － Adjusts the front-to-back This function is set to MID as the SPEAKER SETTING strength of the sound. To adjust the default setting when the vehicle front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR leaves the factory. If you feel the icon. sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose BALANCE － Adjusts the side-to- Hi. side strength of the sound. To adjust the left/right balance, You can also select the icon with the touch the L or R icon. joystick. Move it up and down to Features move the highlighting and scroll The right upper display shows you through lists. Select the icon, then BASS/TREBLE SETTING the current setting of the sound enter the joystick. strength coming from each speaker. － The system will return to the audio BASS Adjusts the bass. SVC (speed-sensitive volume display about 10 seconds after you － compensation) － The SVC mode TREBLE Adjusts the treble. To stop adjusting a mode. adjust the treble and bass, touch controls the volume based on vehicle or on each side of the treble or speed. The faster you go, the louder bass adjustment bar. The adjustment the audio volume becomes. As you bar on the right lower display shows slow down, the audio volume you the current setting. decreases. Touch the appropriate icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the mode.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 147 2009 Fit Audio System Lighting You can use the instrumentbrightness panel control knob to adjustillumination the of the control panelpage (see 76 ). The audio system illuminates when the parking lights are on, even if the radio is turned off.

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) Screen Mode You can select the background screen to display the soundThere level. are three screen modes:(the level sound level is shownvertical with bars), the spectrum analysis (the sound level appears as rippleswater), of and off. Each timethe you background touch icon, the display changes. 148 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

CD ICON

POWER/VOLUME JOYSTICK KNOB Features

OPEN BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

RANDOM FAST FORWARD SKIP ꬽ BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP ꭚ BUTTON CONTINUED

2009 Fit 149 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

To Play a Disc If you have a disc that is a – Maximum layers (In-dash single player) combination of CD-DA tracks and (including ROOT): 8 layers You operate the in-dash disc player MP3/WMA files, you can choose the The specifications for compatible with the same controls used for the format to listen by pressing and WMA files are: radio. To load or play discs, the holding CD/AUX button until you ignition switch must be in the hear a beep. – Sampling frequency: ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Video CDs and DVD discs do not 32/44.1/48 kHz work in this unit. – Bit rate: A disc compressed in AAC format 32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps Do not use discs with adhesive labels. cannot be played in this audio system. – The label can curl up and cause the The specifications for compatible Compatible with variable bit rate disc to jam in the unit. MP3 files are: and multi-session – – Sampling frequency: Maximum layers This audio system can also play 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) (including ROOT): 8 layers CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) NOTE: MP3 or WMA formats. When playing – If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is a disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘ MP3 ’’ Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ protected by digital rights on the screen. In WMA format, management (DRM), the audio unit ‘‘ WMA ’’ will appear on the screen. 160/192/224/256/320 kbps (MPEG1) displays FILE ERROR, and then You can select up to 255 folders and skips to the next file. play up to 999 tracks. If the disc has a 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ complex structure, it takes a while to 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) read the disc before the system – Compatible with variable bit rate begins to play it. and multi-session

150 2009 Fit Features 151

CONTINUED CLOSE BUTTON To return the screen toposition, the press upright the CLOSE buttonthe on edge of the screenuse panel. the Do folded not screen asput a a tray. cup, If for you example,the on liquid the inside screen, the cupthe may screen spill when on you go over a bump. Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) DISC SLOT 2009 Fit Insert a disc about halfwaydisc into slot. the The drive willin pull the the rest disc of theplay way it. and begin to You cannot load and playcm) 3-inch discs (8- in this system. OPEN BUTTON

To Load a Disc The in-dash disc player isnavigation behind screen. the To use theplayer, disc press the OPEN button beside the screen. The screenback, folds and the disc slot appears. Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

Press the AUDIO button beside the To Change or Select Tracks/Files You can also select an icon with the screen to show the audio display and joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or operate the in-dash disc player. PRESET BUTTON'S FUNCTION down to change the highlighting and scroll through lists. Then press the You can also operate the audio ENT on the top of the joystick to system without using the control select the icon. icons on the audio screen. Press the CD/AUX button. The status bar SKIP － Each time you press appears on the bottom of the screen. (preset 6), the player skips forward On the navigation screen, you can to the beginning of the next track see the audio information whenever (file in MP3 or WMA mode). Press you touch the AUDIO INFO or (preset 5), to skip backward to TRACK LIST icons on the lower of the beginning of the current track. the screen. PRESET BUTTONS Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track. When playing a CD recorded with You can use the preset buttons while text data, the track, album, and artist a disc is playing to select passages FF/REW － To move rapidly within name are shown on the audio and change tracks (files in MP3 or a track/file, press and hold display. When playing a disc in MP3 WMA mode). Each preset button's (preset 4) or (preset 3). or WMA, the folder number and function is shown on the bottom of name, the file number and name, the the screen. artist name, and the elapsed time are shown. The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes. If the disc was not recorded with text data, it will not be displayed.

152 2009 Fit Features 153

CONTINUED This － FOLDER ‘‘ in the display. The ’’ FOLDER RANDOM RANDOM system then selects and playsrandomly. files This continues until you deactivate folder random by pressing the RDM button again, orselect if a you different folder withTUNE the bar. In MP3 or WMA mode feature, when activated, plays allin files the selected folder inorder, random rather than in theare order compressed. they To activate folder random, press and hold thebutton. RDM You will see in the ’’ This TRACK This feature, ‘‘ － － Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) 2009 Fit in the display. Press the ’’ FOLDER REPEAT ‘‘ feature plays the tracks/files withindisc a in random order. Totrack activate random, press the RDM(preset button 2). You will see RANDOM RDM button again to returnnormal to play. FOLDER REPEAT In MP3 or WMA mode when activated, replays all filesthe on selected folder in theare order compressed. they To activate folder repeat, press and hold thebutton RPT (preset 1) for 2will seconds. see You display. The system continuously replays the current folder. PressRPT the button again to turnSelecting it a off. different folder withTUNE the bar also turns offrepeat. folder TRACK RANDOM (Random within a disc/folder) side to To select ٕ － in the ’’ side of the TUNE bar to skip TRACK REPEAT ‘‘ ً To continuously replay a track to the next folder, and the FOLDER SELECTION a different folder, press eitherthe side TUNE of bar to movebeginning to of the the next folder.the Press display. Press the RPT buttonto again turn it off. In MP3 or WMA mode move to the beginning offolder. the Press current it again tobeginning skip of to the the previous folder. TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT) － (file in MP3 or WMAthe mode), RPT press button (preset 1).see You will Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) － In MP3 or WMA mode Using a Track List The scan function samples all tracks FOLDER SCAN － This feature, (files in MP3 or WMA) in the order FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON when activated, samples all the first they were recorded. To activate scan, files in each folder on the disc in press the SCAN button. You will see order. To activate folder scan, press ‘‘ TRACK SCAN ’’ in the display. You and hold the SCAN button for 2 will get a 10 second sampling of each seconds. You will see ‘‘ FOLDER track/file on the disc. Press the SCAN ’’ in the display. SCAN button to get out of scan mode and play the last track/file sampled. The system plays the first file in each folder for about 10 seconds. If you do Pressing either SKIP button (preset nothing, the system then plays the 5 or 6) also turns off scan. first file in each folder for 10 seconds FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON each. After playing the first file of the last folder, the system goes to normal You can also select a track/file playing. directly from a track list on the audio display. Press the AUDIO button to Pressing either SKIP button (preset show the audio display, then touch 5 or 6), or selecting a different folder the Track List icon. The track list with the TUNE bar, or pressing the menu appears on the display. SCAN button, also turns off folder scan.

154 2009 Fit Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

When playing a CD recorded with Select the desired track/file by To Stop Playing a Disc text data, each track name is shown touching the icon on the display. The To play the radio when a disc is on the audio display. With a disc selected icon will be highlighted in playing, press the AM/FM button or recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder blue. The system begins to play the touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If number and the location are also selected track/file. With a disc in a PC card is in the audio unit, touch displayed. MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon the CARD icon to play the PC card. on the upper left of the screen to Press the CD/AUX button again or If the disc was not recorded with text move to the root folder. The current touch the CD icon to switch back to Features data, only the track number is folder is highlighted in blue. the in-dash disc player. shown. If you turn the system off while a disc To scroll through the display, touch is playing, either with the power/ the ً or ٕ icon on the side of the volume knob or by turning off the screen. To go back to the previous ignition switch, the disc will stay in display, touch the Return icon on the the drive. When you turn the system screen. back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 155 2009 Fit Protecting Discs For information on how toand handle protect discs, see page 186 . ) to remove the disc. If you ejectnot the remove disc, it but from do thesystem slot, will the automatically reload it after 10 seconds and putmode. it To in begin pause playing, pressCD/AUX the button. To return the screen toposition, the press upright the CLOSE button. You cannot close the screenis if partially a inserted disc into its slot. You can also eject theignition disc switch when is the off. Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) Removing a Disc To remove a disc fromfold the back audio the unit, screen byOPEN pressing button the (see page 150 ). thePress disc eject button ( 156 Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

If you see an error message in the Error Cause Solution display while playing a disc, find the Message cause in the chart to the right. If you Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. cannot clear the error message, take CHECK DISC FOCUS Error Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc player. your vehicle to your dealer. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. The chart on the right explains the Check the disc for damage or deformation. error messages you may see in the MECH ERROR Mechanical Error If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error message does not disappear after the disc is Features display while playing a disc. ejected, see your dealer. If you see an error message in the CHECK DISC Disc Format Error Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. display while playing a disc, press Check the disc for damage or deformation. the eject button. After ejecting the HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to disc, check it for damage or normal. deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer.

2009 Fit 157 Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)

POWER/VOLUME KNOB PC CARD ICON TRACK LIST ICON

JOYSTICK

OPEN BUTTON PLAY MODE ICON

CD/AUX BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP ꭚ BUTTON RANDOM BUTTON FAST FORWARD BUTTON SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

158 2009 Fit Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)

To Play a PC card Always use the recommended ● Never insert foreign objects into You operate the PC card player with memory card with the appropriate the PC card slot. the same controls used for the radio adapter (if an adapter is needed). The specifications for compatible and the in-dash disc player. To load Some memory cards will not work in MP3 files are: or play a card, the ignition switch this unit. must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or – Sampling frequency: ON (II) position. NOTE: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) ● When you insert a PC card into the 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) Features The PC card player reads and plays slot, make sure you put it in cards in MP3 or WMA formats. – Bit rate: straight. If you cannot insert it, Depending on the format, the screen 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ remove it, and insert again. will indicate ‘‘ MP3 ’’ or ‘‘ WMA ’’ 160/192/224/256/320 kbps when a card is playing. The card limit ● Do not keep PC cards in the (MPEG1) of the player is 255 folders and 999 vehicle. Direct sunlight and high 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ tracks. If the card has a complex heat will damage them. 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) structure, it takes some time for the ● To avoid damaging the card – Compatible with variable bit rate system to begin playing it. reader, do not insert hard disc and multi-session drive cards into the PC card slot. Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2, – Maximum layers the recommended PC cards for the ● You cannot close the screen (move (including ROOT): 8 layers PC card reader are: it to the upright position) until the CompactFlash PC card is inserted all the way into Flash ATA its slot or removed. SD memory card

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 159 Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)

The specifications for compatible Loading a PC Card Insert a PC card straight into the slot. WMA files are: The drive will read the PC card and PC CARD SLOT – Sampling frequency: begin to play it. 32/44.1/48 kHz Return the screen to the upright position by pressing the CLOSE – Bit rate: button on the edge of the screen 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps panel. – Compatible with variable bit rate Press the AUDIO button beside the and multi-session screen to show the audio display and – Maximum layers operate the PC card player. (including ROOT): 8 layers You can also operate the audio In WMA format, DRM (digital rights system without using the control management) files cannot be played. The PC card slot is behind the icons on the audio screen. Press any If the system finds a DRM file, it navigation screen. To use the PC of the appropriate control buttons. skips that file and plays the next card player, press the OPEN button The status bar appears on the bottom available folder or file. beside the screen. The screen folds of the screen. On the navigation back, and the PC card slot appears. screen, you can see the audio information whenever you touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the screen.

160 2009 Fit Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)

There are three play modes: Folder, To Select a Play Mode Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY MODE icon, then choose one of the PLAY MODE ICON modes by touching its icon. When a mode is selected, it is highlighted in FOLDER MODE blue.

● Folder mode plays tracks in the MODE INDICATOR order they were added to the card. Features

● Artist mode plays tracks in alphabetical order, by artist and song title.

● Album mode plays albums (folders) in alphabetical order. PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON If play mode information was not ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE included in the tracks/files when they were added to the card, it will not be displayed on the screen.

MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 161 Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)

PLAY MODE ICON

To select a play mode, push the Select the desired mode by touching After you select the play mode, the AUDIO button to show the audio the appropriate icon, or move the display changes to the selectable display, then touch the PLAY MODE joystick, then press the ENT. playing menu. If you select icon on the display. ‘‘ Continue playing the current song, ’’ the system goes into the selected play mode after playing the current file.

162 2009 Fit Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)

If you select ‘‘ Play a new track list, ’’ To Change or Select Tracks/Files Icons on the screen can also be the system goes into the selected ’ selected with the joystick. Move the play mode immediately and begins to PRESET BUTTON S FUNCTION joystick left or right and up or down play the new track list. until the icon is highlighted, then press the ENT on the top of the To go back to the previous screen, joystick to select the icon. press the CANCEL button on the right side of the screen. To exit the play mode screens, press the AUDIO Features button.

PRESET BUTTONS You can use the preset buttons while a card is playing to select or change files. Each preset button's function is shown on the bottom of the screen.

CONTINUED 2009 Fit 163 Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)

SKIP － Each time you press TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT) TRACK RANDOM (Random (preset 6), the player skips forward － To continuously replay a file, within a folder) － This feature to the beginning of the next file. press the RPT button (preset 1). You plays the files within a folder in Press (preset 5), to skip will see ‘‘ TRACK REPEAT ’’ in the random order. To activate random backward to the beginning of the display. Press the RPT button again play, press the RDM button (preset current file. Press it again to skip to to turn it off. 2). You will see ‘‘ TRACK the beginning of the previous file. RANDOM ’’ in the display. Press the FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM RDM button again to return to FF/REW － To move rapidly within REPEAT － This feature, when normal play. a file, press and hold (preset 4) activated, replays all the files on the or (preset 3). selected folder/artist/album in the FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM order they are recorded or listed. To RANDOM － This feature, when FOLDER SELECTION － To select activate each repeat mode, press and activated, plays all files in each a different folder, press either side of hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2 folder/artist/album in random order, the TUNE bar to move the beginning seconds. You will see ‘‘ FOLDER rather than in the order they are of the next folder. Press the ً side REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or recorded or listed. To activate each of the TUNE bar to skip the next ALBUM REPEAT ’’ in the display. random play, push and hold the .folder, and to the ٕ side to move the The system continuously replays the RDM button (preset 2) for 2 seconds beginning of the current folder. current folder/artist/album. Press You will see ‘‘ FOLDER RANDOM, Press it again to skip to the and hold the RPT button again to ARTIST RANDOM or ALBUM beginning of the previous folder. turn it off. Pressing the RDM button, RANDOM ’’ in the display. or selecting a different folder/artist/ album with the TUNE bar also turns off the repeat feature.

164 2009 Fit Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)

The system then selects and plays FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM SCAN Pressing either of the SKIP buttons files randomly. This continues until － This feature, when activated, (preset 5 or 6), selecting a different you deactivate each random play by samples the first file in each folder/ folder/artist/album with the TUNE pressing the RDM button again. artist/album on the PC card in order. bar, or pressing the SCAN button, To activate each scan feature, press also turns off the scan feature. SCAN － The SCAN function and hold the SCAN button. You will samples all the files on the PC card in see ‘‘ FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST the order they are recorded. To SCAN or ALBUM SCAN ’’ in the Features activate the scan feature, press the display. SCAN button. You will see ‘‘ TRACK SCAN ’’ in the display. You will get a The system plays the first file in the 10 second sampling of each file on folder for about 10 seconds. If you do the PC card. Press the SCAN button nothing, the system plays the first again to get out of scan mode and file in each folder, in order, for 10 play the last file sampled. seconds each. After playing the first file of the last folder/artist/album, Pressing either of the SKIP buttons the system returns to normal play. (preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan feature.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 165 ARTIST NAME In artist mode, the artistdisplayed name on is the also right sideselectable of icon. each Select the desired file. RETURN ICON 2009 Fit icon on the side of the ٕ or ً FOLDER ICON To scroll through the display,the touch screen. To go back todisplay, the touch previous the Return icon. To play a file, touchscreen. its In icon folder on mode, the touchfolder the icon on the upperscreen left to of move the to theThe root current folder. folder is highlightedblue. in TRACK LIST ICON

Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) Using a Track List You can also select afrom file a directly track list onPress the the audio AUDIO display. button toaudio show display, the then touch theList Track icon. The track listappears menu on the display. 166 Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)

Song Search Function ALBUM NAME TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON SONG SEARCH ICON Features

ARTIST ICON ALBUM ICON RETURN ICON In album mode, the album name is Folder mode is shown. You can then select any of three also displayed on the right side of modes to search a file: Title by When you select ‘‘ Song Search ’’ each selectable icon. Select the keyword, Artist, and Album. from the track list display, the song desired file. search menu appears.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 167 ARTIST LIST

Searching for a Song by Artist Name Select the Artist icon, andlist the appears. artist Select the desiredand artist, the artist's file list is displayed. ٕ or ً FILE LIST 2009 Fit After the system searches fora a file song, list is displayed.through To the scroll list, touch the icon on the side ofthe the desired screen. file Select by touchingappropriate the icon, or moving the joystick and pressing the ENT. LIST ICON MORE ICON DELETE ICON

Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) Searching for a Song Title by keyword In Title by keyword mode,title enter name, the or any keyword,touching by the letter icons onscreen. the Press the List iconthe to song begin search. If youCANCEL press button the on the control panel, the display returns tomode the menu without doing a search. To cancel the selected letter,the touch Delete icon. To selectcharacters, more touch the More icon.other The character list will be shown. 168 Features 169 )to To remove a PC cardunit, from fold the back audio the screenpressing by the OPEN button (see150 ). page Press the eject button ( Removing a PC Card remove the card. If youremove do it not from the slot,return you the cannot screen to theposition. upright To return the screen toposition, the press upright the CLOSE button. You can also eject aignition card switch when is the off. PC Card Player Malfunction If there is a problemplayer, with see the your PC dealer. card 2009 Fit Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) To Stop Playing a PCTo card play the radio whenplaying, a press PC the card AM/FM is buttontouch or the FM1, FM2, ora AM disc icon. is If in theCD/AUX audio button unit, or press touch the theicon CD to play the disc.CARD Touch icon the to switch backcard to player. the PC If you turn the systemcard off is while playing, a either PC withpower/volume the knob or by turningthe off ignition switch, the cardin will the stay drive. When yousystem turn back the on, the cardplaying will where begin it left off. When you leave the vehicle,remove always the PC card fromunit. the audio ALBUM LIST

Searching for a Song by Album Name Select the Album icon, andlist the appears. album Select the desired album, and its song listYou is can displayed. then select thefrom desired the song list. Playing an iPod® (Models with navigation system)

POWER/VOLUME KNOB USB ICON iPod INDICATOR

JOYSTICK

CD/AUX BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON SKIP ꭚ BUTTON RANDOM BUTTON SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

170 2009 Fit Playing an iPod® (Models with navigation system)

To Play an iPodꭂ Voice Control System NOTE: You can select the AUX mode by This audio system can operate the ● ꭂ using the navigation system voice Do not connect your iPod using a audio files on the iPod with the HUB. same controls used for the in-dash control buttons, but cannot operate disc player. To play an iPod, connect the play mode functions. ● Do not keep the iPod in the it to the USB adapter cable in the iPods that are compatible with your vehicle. Direct sunlight and high upper glove box by using your dock audio system are listed below. heat will damage it. connector, then press the CD/AUX Features Model Firmwareꭧ ● Do not use an extension cable button. The ignition switch must be between the USB adapter cable in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) iPod 5G Ver. 1.2 or more iPod classic Ver. 1.0 or more equipped with your vehicle and position. The iPod will also be your dock connector. recharged with the ignition switch in iPod nano Ver. 1.2 or more these positions. iPod nano 2nd Ver. 1.1.2 or more ● We recommend backing up your generation data before playing it. The audio system reads and plays iPod nano 3rd Ver. 1.0 or more sound files to be playable on the generation In AAC format, DRM (digital rights iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod touch Ver. 1.1.1 or more management) files cannot be played. iPod as a mass storage device. The iPhone Ver. 1.1.1 or more If the system finds a DRM file, the system will only play songs stored on ꭧ : Use the latest firmware. audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE, the iPod with iTunes. and then skips to the next file. Use only compatible iPods with the iPod and iTunes are registered latest firmware. iPods that are not trademarks owned by Apple Inc. compatible will not work in this audio unit.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 171 s audio unit. ’ on the iPod. That ꭧ OK to disconnect. : It may take a few minutes for the Sample Display means you can only operateiPod your using the vehicle ꭧ Honda mark to display onthe the display iPod. does If not change,function this is not supported oniPod your model or firmware. When the iPod is connectediPod and mode the is selected ondisplay, the the audio iPod indicator ison shown the screen. After loading,see you Honda will mark 2009 Fit USB CONNECTOR the iPod correctly and securely. USB connector securely. DOCK CONNECTOR 2. Connect your dock connector to 3. Install the dock connector to the (Models with navigation system) ® USB ADAPTER CABLE USB CONNECTOR out the USB adapter cable. 1. Open the upper glove box, and pull Playing an iPod Connecting an iPod 172 Playing an iPod® (Models with navigation system)

If the audio system still does not To Select a File from iPod Menu recognize the iPod, the iPod may need to be reset. Follow the instructions that came with your iPod, or you can find reset instructions online at www.apple.com/ ipod. The current file number and total of Features the selected playable files are displayed on the screen. It also shows the artist, album and track (file) names on the screen. Select the desired mode by touching To Change or Select Files the appropriate icon, or move the You can also select a file from any on Use the SKIP button while an iPod is joystick, then press the ENT. playing to select passages and the iPod menu: playlists, artists, ‘‘ ’’ change files. albums and songs. Press the AUDIO If you select ALL on either the button to display the screen, then artists or albums list, all available SKIP － Each time you press the touch the iPod MENU icon. files on the selected list are played. SKIP + button (Preset 6), the system skips forward to the beginning of the Press the AUDIO button to go back next file. Press the SKIP － button to the normal audio playing display. (Preset 5), to skip backward to the Pressing the CANCEL button goes beginning of the current file. Press it back to the previous screen, and again to skip to the beginning of the pressing the MAP button cancels the previous file. audio control display on the screen. CONTINUED

2009 Fit 173 This feature in the display. ’’ － This feature in the display. To turn it ’’ － REPEAT TRACK RANDOM REPEAT continuously plays a file. Tothe activate repeat feature, press thebutton RPT (Preset 1). You will‘‘ see To turn it off, press(Preset the 2). RDM button plays all available files fromselected the items in the iPod(playlists, menu artists, list albums or songs)random in order. To activate therandom track feature, press the RDM button (Preset 2). You will‘‘ see off, press the RPT buttonagain. (Preset 1) TRACK RANDOM RETURN ICON 2009 Fit icon on the side of the ٕ or ً To scroll through the display,the touch You can select any typerandom of mode repeat by and using thebutton RPT or RDM button. screen. To go back todisplay, the touch previous the Return icon. To play a file, touchscreen. its The icon current on folder the is highlighted in blue. To Select Repeat or Random Mode: (Models with navigation system) ® TRACK LIST ICON

Playing an iPod Using a Track List You can also select afrom file a directly track list onPress the the audio AUDIO display. button toaudio show display, the then touch theList Track icon. The track listappears menu on the display. 174 Playing an iPod® (Models with navigation system)

ALBUM RANDOM－ This feature To Stop Playing Your iPod ꭧ : The displayed message may vary plays all available albums from the To play the radio when an iPod is on models or versions. On some selected items in the iPod menu list playing, press the FM/AM button or models, there is no message to (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If disconnect. random order. The files in each a disc is in the audio unit, press the When you disconnect the iPod while album are played in the recored CD/AUX button or touch the CD it is playing, the navigation screen order. To activate the album random icon to play the disc. If a PC card is in shows ‘‘ NO DATA. ’’ feature, press and hold the RDM the audio unit, Press the CD/AUX Features button (Preset 2). You will see button or touch the CARD icon to If you reconnect the same iPod, the ‘‘ ALBUM RANDOM ’’ in the display. play a PC card. system may begin playing where it To turn it off, press and hold the left off, depending on what mode the Press the CD/AUX button again or RDM button (Preset 2). iPod is in when it is reconnected. touch the AUX icon to switch back to You can also select another list from the iPod. iPod Error Messages the iPod menu while keeping the Disconnecting an iPod If you see an error message on the random function. You can disconnect the iPod at any screen, see page 176 . NOTE: time when you see ‘‘ OK to Disconnect ’’ messageꭧ in the iPod Available operating function varies display. Always make sure you see on models or versions. Some ‘‘ OK to Disconnect ’’ message in the functions may not be available on the ’ iPod display before you disconnect it. vehicle s audio system. Make sure to follow the iPod’s instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable.

2009 Fit 175 iPod® Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

If you see an error message on the Error screen while playing an iPod, find the Solution Message solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer. UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.

NO SONG Information of music is nothing.

176 2009 Fit Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

POWER/VOLUME KNOB USB ICON WMA/MP3 INDICATOR

JOYSTICK Features

CD/AUX BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE FOLDER BAR

REPEAT BUTTON SKIP ꭚ BUTTON RANDOM BUTTON SKIP ꬽ BUTTON CONTINUED

2009 Fit 177 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

To Play a USB Flash Memory The recommended USB flash ● We recommend backing up your Device memory devices are 256 Mbyte or data before playing a USB flash This audio system can operate the higher. Some digital audio players memory device. audio files on a USB flash memory may be compatible as well. ● Depending on the type and device with the same controls used Some USB flash memory device number of files, it may take some for the in-dash disc player. To play a (such as devices with security time before they begin to play. USB flash memory device, connect it lockout features, etc.) will not work to the USB adapter cable in the ● Depending on the software the in this audio unit. upper glove box, then press the CD/ files were made with, it may not be AUX button. The ignition switch NOTE: possible to play some files, or must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or display some text data. ● Do not use a device such as a card ON (II) position. reader or hard drive as the device Voice Control System The audio system reads and plays or your files may be damaged. You can select the AUX mode by the audio files on the USB flash using the navigation system voice ● Do not connect your USB flash control buttons, but cannot operate memory device in MP3, WMA or memory device using a HUB. AACꭧ formats. Depending on the the play mode functions. format, the display shows MP3, ● Do not use an extension cable to The specifications for compatible WMA or AAC when a USB flash the USB adapter cable equipped MP3 files are: memory device is playing. The USB with your vehicle. flash memory device limit is up to – Sampling frequency: ● Do not keep the USB flash 700 folders or up to 65535 files. 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) memory device in the vehicle. 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2) ꭧ : Only AAC format files recorded Direct sunlight and high heat will with iTunes are playable on this damage it. audio unit.

178 2009 Fit Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

– Bit rate: – Partition: In WMA or AAC format, DRM 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ Top partition only (digital rights management) files 160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps cannot be played. If the system finds – Maximum layers: 8 (MPEG1) a DRM file, the audio unit displays 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ The specifications for compatible UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips 112/128/144/160/VBR kbps AAC files are: to the next file. (MPEG2) – Sampling frequency: Connecting a USB Flash Memory – Supported standards: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/ Device Features MPEG1 Audio Layer3 44.1/48 kHz USB CONNECTOR MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3 – Bit rate: – Partition: 8 － 320 kbps Top partition only – Supported standards: – Maximum layers: 8 MPEG4/AAC LC MPEG2/AAC LC The specifications for compatible WMA files are: – Partition: Top partition only – Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz – Maximum layers: 8 – Bit rate: Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or USB ADAPTER CABLE 48 － 320/VBR kbps (Max 384) AAC format, a file with unsupported 1. Open the upper glove box, and pull version cannot be played. If the – Supported standards: out the USB adapter cable. system finds it, the audio unit WMA version 7/8/9 displays UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to the next file. CONTINUED

2009 Fit 179 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

To Change or Select Files Using a Track List Use the SKIP button while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files. SKIP － Each time you press the SKIP + button (Preset 6), the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press the SKIP － button (Preset 5), to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it USB CONNECTOR again to skip to the beginning of the previous file. 2. Connect the USB flash memory TRACK LIST ICON device to the USB connector FOLDER SELECTION － To select You can also select a file directly correctly and securely. a different folder, press either side of the TUNE FOLDER bar. Press the from a track list on the audio display. When the USB flash memory device side to skip to the next folder, and Press the AUDIO button to show the is connected and the USB mode is ً audio display, then touch the Track press the ٕ side to skip to the selected on the audio system, the beginning of the previous folder. List icon. The track list menu WMA or MP3 indicator is shown on appears on the display. the navigation screen. It also shows the folder and file numbers, and the elapsed time on the screen.

180 2009 Fit Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

－ － FOLDER ICON TRACK REPEAT This feature FOLDER RANDOM This feature continuously plays a file. To activate plays the files in the selected folder the track repeat feature, press the in random order. To activate the RPT button (Preset 1). You will see folder random feature, press and ‘‘ TRACK REPEAT ’’ in the display. hold the RDM button (Preset 2). You To turn it off, press the RPT button will see ‘‘ FOLDER RANDOM ’’ in (Preset 1). the display. To turn it off, press and

hold the RDM button (Preset 2). Features FOLDER REPEAT－ This feature replays all the files in the selected TRACK SCAN － This feature folder in the order they are stored. samples all files in the selected folder RETURN ICON To activate the folder repeat feature, in the order they are stored. To press and hold the RPT button activate the scan feature, press the To scroll through the display, touch (Preset 1). You will see ‘‘ FOLDER SCAN button. You will see ‘‘ TRACK the ً or ٕ icon on the side of the REPEAT ’’ in the display. To turn it SCAN ’’ in the display. You will also screen. To go back to the previous off, press and hold the RPT button see the file number blinking. You will display, touch the Return icon. (Preset 1). get a 10 second sampling of each file in the folder. Press the SCAN button To play a file, touch its icon on the TRACK RANDOM － This feature to get out of the scan mode. The screen. The current folder is plays all the files in random order. To system plays the last file sampled. highlighted in blue. activate the track random feature, To Select Repeat, Random or Scan press the RDM button (Preset 2). Mode: You will see ‘‘ TRACK RANDOM ’’ in You can select any type of repeat, the display. To turn it off, press the random and scan modes by using the RDM button (Preset 2). RPT button or RDM button, or SCAN button. CONTINUED

2009 Fit 181 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

FOLDER SCAN－ This feature To Stop Playing a USB Flash Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory samples the first file in each folder in Memory Device Device the order they are stored. To activate To play the radio when a USB flash You can disconnect the USB flash the folder scan feature, press and memory device is playing, press the memory device in any time even if hold the SCAN button. You will see FM/AM button or touch the FM1, the USB mode is selected on the ‘‘ FOLDER SCAN ’’ in the display. FM2, or AM icon. If a disc is in the audio system. Always follow the USB You will also see the folder number audio unit, press the CD/AUX button flash memory device’s instructions blinking. You will get a 10 second or touch the CD icon to play the disc. when you remove it. sampling of each first file in the If a PC card is in the audio unit, press When you disconnect the USB flash folder(s). Press the SCAN button to the CD/AUX button or touch the memory device while it is playing, get out of the scan mode. The system CARD icon to play a PC card. the navigation screen shows ‘‘ NO plays the last file sampled. Press the CD/AUX button again or DATA. ’’ touch the AUX icon to switch back to If you reconnect the same USB flash the USB flash memory device. memory device, the system will begin playing where it left off. USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages If you see an error message on the screen, see page 183 .

182 2009 Fit USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

If you see an error message on the Error screen while playing a USB flash Solution Message memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your UNPLAYABLE The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory FILE device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged. vehicle to your dealer.

UNSUPPORTED Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted. Features

NO SONG Information of music is nothing.

2009 Fit 183 FM/AM Radio Reception

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such Those bands cover these as the distance from the station's frequencies: transmitter, nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions. AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station's signal gets weaker as you get farther away from its Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz AM station, you will notice the sound apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the volume becoming weaker, and the FM band are assigned frequencies at station drifting in and out. If you are least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of a Stations must use these exact see the stereo indicator flickering off station that is broadcasting on a frequencies. It is fairly common for and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of stations to round-off the frequency in Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can their advertising, so your radio could go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio's reception. You display a frequency of 100.9 even completely as you get out of range of may temporarily hear both stations, though the announcer may identify the station's signal. or hear only the station you are close the station as ‘‘ FM101. ’’ to.

184 2009 Fit FM/AM Radio Reception

Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources can cause temporary reception problems. As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's

authority to operate the equipment. Features

Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to signal from the station's transmitter, receive a distant radio station one and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions. a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving.

2009 Fit 185 Protecting Your Discs

General Information Protecting Discs ● When using CD-R or CD-RW When a disc is not being played, discs, use only high quality discs store it in its case to protect it from labeled for audio use. dust and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep discs out of ● When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat. CD-RW, the recording must be closed for it to be used by the To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. system. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside edge. ● Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped discs may jam in the A new disc may be rough on the drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never ● Handle your discs properly to can flake off and fall on the recording prevent damage and skipping. touch either surface. Do not place surface of the disc, causing skipping stabilizer rings or labels on the disc. or other problems. Remove these These, along with contamination pieces by rubbing the inner and from finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip outer edges with the side of a pencil pens, can cause the disc to not play Do not use discs with adhesive labels. or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit. Never try to insert foreign objects in the disc player.

186 2009 Fit Protecting Your Discs

Additional Information of 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs Recommended Discs The in-dash disc player has a sophisticated and delicate mechanism. If you insert a damaged disc as indicated in this section, it may become stuck inside and damage the audio unit. Features Examples of these discs are shown to the right: Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring

2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs

Chipped/ Warped Cracked Burrs

CONTINUED 2009 Fit 187 Protecting Your Discs

4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs ● Recommended discs are printed with the following logo.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape Fingerprints, scratches, etc. ● Audio unit may not play the ● CD-R or CD-RW may not play due following formats. to the recording conditions.

● Scratches and fingerprints on the discs may cause the sound to skip.

Can Shape Arrow Shape

188 2009 Fit Features 189

CONTINUED ) to return to the － Remote Audio Controls ) of the CH button. Press the ＋ If you are playing aflash disc, memory iPod device, or the USB system skips to the beginning oftrack the (file next in MP3, WMAformat) or each AAC time you press( the top bottom ( beginning of the current track/file. Press it twice to returnprevious to track/file. the You will see the track/fileand number the elapsed time. Iftext the data disc or has is compressedWMA, in you MP3 can or also seeinformation any (track other title, file name, folder name, etc.). )of ＋ ). Press the top ), the system goes ▼ － 2009 Fit )or( ＋ ) or down ( ▲ ) to go back to the previous － The VOL button adjusts theup volume ( or bottom of the buttonuntil and the hold desired it volume isthen reached, release it. The MODE button changes the mode. Pressing the button repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, disc or a PC cardcard (if is a loaded), disc or or anconnected a audio to PC unit the auxiliary inputor jack the USB adapter cable. If you are listening tothe the CH radio, button use to changeEach stations. time you press the top ( the button, the system goesnext to preset the station on theare band listening you to. Press the( bottom station. If you press andbutton hold ( the CH into the seek mode. Itwith finds a a strong station signal. VOL BUTTON MODE BUTTON CH BUTTON

On vehicles with navigation system Three controls for the audioare system mounted in the steeringhub. wheel These let you controlfunctions basic without removing your hand from the wheel. Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use Auxiliary Input Jack the skip function to select folders. Press and hold the top (＋) of the CH button until you hear a beep, to skip forward to the first file of the next folder. Press the bottom (－) to skip backward to the previous folder. If you are playing a PC card, press the top (＋) of the CH button to advance to the next file. Press the bottom (－) to go back to the On vehicles without navigation system previous file. On vehicles with navigation system Your vehicle has the auxiliary input jack on the front panel. The system will accept auxiliary input from standard audio accessories. When a compatible audio unit is connected to the jack, press the CD/ AUX (On vehicles with navigation system) or AUX (On vehicles without navigation system) button to select it.

190 2009 Fit Radio Theft Protection

Your vehicle's audio system will If your vehicle's battery is disable itself if it is disconnected disconnected or goes dead, or the from electrical power for any reason. radio fuse is removed, the audio To make it work again, you must system will disable itself. If this enter a specific digit code using the happens, you will see ‘‘ ENTER preset buttons. Because there are CODE ’’ in the frequency display the hundreds of number combinations next time you turn on the system. possible from specific digits, making Use the preset buttons to enter the Features the system work without knowing code. On vehicles with navigation the exact code is nearly impossible. system, touch the Done icon to set the code. The code is on the radio You should have received a card that code card included in your owner's lists your audio system's code and manual kit. When it is entered serial numbers. It is best to store this correctly, the radio will start playing. card in a safe place at home. In addition, you should write the audio If you make a mistake entering the system's serial number in this code, do not start over; complete the owner's manual. sequence, then enter the correct code. You have 10 tries to enter the If you lose the card, you must obtain correct code. If you are unsuccessful the code number from a dealer. To in 10 attempts, you must then leave do this, you will need the system's the system on for 1 hour before serial number. trying again.

2009 Fit 191 CLOCK

On vehicles with navigation system The navigation system receives signals from the global positioning system (GPS), and the displayed time is updated automatically byGPS. the Refer to the navigationmanual system for how to adjust the time. 3 (R) BUTTON 2 (M) BUTTON 1 (H) BUTTON 2009 Fit FM/AM (CLOCK) BUTTON For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00 1:53 will reset to 2:00 Press and hold the FM/AM (CLOCK) button until the displayed time begins to blink, thenbutton. release Change the the hours by pressing the 1 (H) buttonnumbers until advance the to the desired time. Change the minutes by pressing the 2 (M) buttonnumbers until advance the to the desired time. Press the FM/AM (CLOCK) button again to enter the set time. You can quickly set thenearest time hour. to If the the displayedbefore time the is half hour, pressAM the (CLOCK) FM/ button until youbeep, hear then a press the 3set (R) the button clock to back tohour. the If previous the displayed timehalf is hour, after the the clock setsthe forward beginning to of the next hour. Setting the Clock On vehicles without navigation system 192 Features 193 Security System to see if the doors and 62 ) To see if the system is set tailgate are fully closed. Sincenot it part is of the monitormanually display, check the hood. NOTE: after you exit the vehicle,LOCK press button the on the remote transmitter within 5 seconds. Ifsystem the is set, the hornonce. will beep Do not attempt to alteradd this other system devices or to it. The security system will nothood, set tailgate, if or the any doorclosed. is If not the fully system willcheck not the set, door and tailgateindicator open on the instrument panel (see page 2009 Fit SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR Once the security system isopening set, any door, the tailgate,hood or without the using the keyremote or transmitter, the will cause italarm. to It also alarms ifremoved the from radio the is dashboard orwiring the is cut. The alarm will also bepassenger activated inside if the a locked vehicle turns the ignition switch on.

On Sport model The security system helps toyour protect vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds andcombination a of headlights, parking/ side marker lights and taillights flashes if someone attempts tointo break your vehicle or removeunit. the This audio alarm continues forminutes, 2 then the system resets.reset To an activated system before2 the minutes have elapsed, unlockdriver's the door with the keyremote or transmitter. the The security system automatically sets 15 seconds after youdoors, lock hood, the and the tailgate.system For to the activate, you mustdoors lock and the the tailgate fromoutside the with the key, driver'stab, lock door lock master switch,remote or transmitter. The security system indicator on the instrument panel starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself. the steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel comes on to show the system is now activated. 3. Press the SET/DECEL button on Cruise control may not holdspeed the when set you are goingdown up hills. and If your speedgoing increases down a hill, useslow the down. brakes This to will cancelcontrol. cruise To resume the setpress speed, the RES/ACCEL button. The indicator on the instrument panelcome will back on. When climbing a steep hill,automatic the transmission may downshift to hold the set speed. CANCEL BUTTON RES/ACCEL BUTTON 2009 Fit The main switch can be left SET/DECEL BUTTON steering wheel. The CRUISE MAIN indicator on the instrument panel comes on. speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). CRUISE BUTTON Using the Cruise Control 1. Press the CRUISE button on the NOTE: on, even when the systemuse. is not in 2. Accelerate to the desired cruising Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash. Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather. Cruise control allows you toa maintain set speed above 25without mph keeping (40 your km/h) foot onaccelerator the pedal. It should befor used cruising on straight, open highways. It is not recommendedcity for driving, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. Cruise Control On Sport model and Canadian LX model 194 Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising Even with the cruise control turned You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: on, you can still use the accelerator speed in any of these ways: pedal to speed up for passing. After ● Press and hold the SET/DECEL completing the pass, take your foot ● Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed. off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle desired cruising speed, release the will return to the set cruising speed. ● To slow down in very small button. Resting your foot on the brake or amounts, tap the SET/DECEL Features clutch pedal causes the cruise ● To increase your speed in very button. Each time you do this, small amounts, tap the RES/ your vehicle will slow down about control to cancel. ACCEL button. Each time you do 1 mph (1.6 km/h). this, the vehicle will speed up ● Tap the brake or clutch pedal about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). lightly with your foot. The CRUISE ● Push on the accelerator pedal. CONTROL indicator on the Accelerate to the desired cruising instrument panel goes out. When speed, then press the SET/ the vehicle slows to the desired DECEL button. speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 195 Cruise Control

Canceling Cruise Control Tapping either of the paddle shifters Resuming the Set Speed shifts the gear up or down, but does When you push the CANCEL button, CRUISE BUTTON not cancel the cruise control. For or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the more information on driving with system will remember the previously paddle shifters, see page 224. set cruising speed. To return to that speed, accelerate to above 25 mph (40 km/h), and then press the RES/ ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. The vehicle will accelerate to the same cruising speed as before.

CANCEL BUTTON Pressing the CRUISE button turns the system off and erases the You can cancel cruise control in any previous cruising speed. of these ways:

● Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

● Press the CANCEL button on the steering wheel.

● Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel.

196 2009 Fit Before Driving

Before you begin driving your Break-in Period ...... 198 vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation ...... 198 gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures ...... 199 levels of important fluids. You also Refueling...... 199 need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing the luggage or packages. The Hood...... 200 information in this section will help Oil Check...... 201 you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check ...... 202

accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy...... 203 Driving Before read the information in this section Accessories and first. Modifications ...... 206 Carrying Cargo ...... 208

2009 Fit 197 Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Some gasoline today is blended with Help assure your vehicle's future Your vehicle is designed to operate oxygenates such as ethanol or reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use of operate on oxygenated gasoline during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). a lower octane gasoline can cause a containing up to 10% ethanol by During this period: persistent, heavy metallic rapping volume and up to 15% MTBE by volume. Do not use gasoline ● Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid noise that can lead to engine damage. containing methanol. acceleration. We recommend using quality If you notice any undesirable ● Avoid hard braking for the first 200 containing detergent operating symptoms, try another miles (300 km). additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. service station or switch to another ● Do not change the oil until the brand of gasoline. scheduled maintenance time. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and For further important fuel-related You should also follow these emissions control, we strongly information, please refer to your recommendations with an recommend, in areas where it is Quick Start Guide. overhauled or exchanged engine, or available, the use of gasoline that when the brakes are replaced. does NOT contain manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT. Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact your authorized dealer for service.

198 2009 Fit Service Station Procedures

Refueling HOLDER 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel 1. Park with the driver's side closest nozzle automatically clicks off. Do to the service station pump. not try to ‘‘ top off ’’ the tank. Leave TETHER some room for the fuel to expand FUEL FILL DOOR Pull out with temperature changes. If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even though the tank is not full, there may be a problem with your

Push vehicle's fuel vapor recovery Driving Before system. The system helps keep FUEL FILL CAP fuel vapor from going into the atmosphere. Try filling at another 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. pump. If this does not fix the You may hear a hissing sound as problem, consult your dealer. pressure inside the tank escapes. 2. Outside of the vehicle, push on the Place the fuel fill cap in the holder right side edge of the fuel fill door on the fuel fill door. To prevent the in the middle. The fuel fill door will fuel fill cap from becoming lost, it pop up slightly. Pull it outward to is attached to the fuel filler with a open it. tether.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 199 Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Hood LATCH Gasoline is highly flammable HOOD RELEASE HANDLE and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

● Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.

● Handle fuel only outdoors.

● Wipe up spills immediately. 2. Put your fingers under the front edge of the hood near the center. 1. Park the vehicle, and set the 5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on until Slide your hand to the left until parking brake. Pull the hood it clicks at least once. If you do not you feel the hood latch handle. release handle under the lower left properly tighten the cap, the Push this handle up to release it. corner of the dashboard. The hood malfunction indicator lamp may Lift up the hood. come on (see page 304). You will will pop up slightly. also see a ‘‘ CHECK FUEL CAP ’’ If the hood latch handle moves message on the information stiffly, or if you can open the hood display. without lifting the handle, the mechanism should be cleaned and 6. Push the fuel fill door closed until lubricated. it latches.

200 2009 Fit Service Station Procedures

SUPPORT ROD Oil Check DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK eoeDriving Before LOWER MARK

GRIP CLIP 3. Holding the grip, pull the support 4. Remove the dipstick again, and rod out of its clip. Insert the end check the level. It should be Wait a few minutes after turning the between the upper and lower into the designated hole in the engine off before you check the oil. hood. marks. 1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). To close the hood, lift it up slightly to If it is near or below the lower mark, remove the support rod from the 2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean see Adding Engine Oil on page 253. hole. Put the support rod back into cloth or paper towel. its holding clip. Lower the hood to 3. Insert the dipstick all the way back about a foot (30 cm) above the into its hole. fender, then let it drop. Make sure it is securely latched.

2009 Fit 201 Service Station Procedures

Engine Coolant Check Refer to Owner's Maintenance Checks on page 250 for information RESERVE TANK about checking other items on your vehicle.

MAX

MIN Look at the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is below the MIN line, see Adding Engine Coolant on page 256 for information on adding the proper coolant.

202 2009 Fit Fuel Economy

Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel Economy Estimates Comparison. Fuel economy is not a fixed number. City MPG Highway MPG It varies based on driving conditions, driving habits and vehicle condition. Therefore, it is not possible for one set of estimates to predict fuel economy precisely for all drivers in all environments.

Combined Fuel Estimated Annual Driving Before The EPA fuel economy estimates Economy Fuel Cost shown in the example to the right are (Sample U.S. EPA label shown) a useful tool for comparison when buying a vehicle. EPA estimates Combined Fuel Economy － Estimated Annual Fuel Cost － include: Represents a combination of city and Provides an estimated annual fuel City MPG － Represents urban highway driving. The scale cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000 driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A represents the range of combined km) per year multiplied by the cost range of miles per gallon achieved is fuel economy for other vehicles in per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost also provided. the class. data) divided by the combined fuel economy. Highway MPG － Represents a mixture of rural and interstate For more information on fuel driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, economy ratings and factors that typical of longer trips in free-flowing affect fuel economy, visit www. traffic. A range of miles per gallon fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www. achieved is also provided. vehicles.gc.ca) CONTINUED

2009 Fit 203 Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy Factors Improving Fuel Economy ● Keep your vehicle clean － In The following factors can lower your Vehicle Maintenance particular, a build-up of snow or vehicle's fuel economy: A properly maintained vehicle mud on your vehicle's underside adds weight and rolling resistance. ● Aggressive driving (hard maximizes fuel economy. Poor Frequent cleaning helps your fuel acceleration and braking) maintenance can significantly reduce fuel economy. Always maintain your economy. ● Excessive idling, accelerating and vehicle according to the maintenance Drive Efficiently braking in stop-and-go traffic messages displayed on the ● Drive moderately － Rapid ● Cold engine operation ( information display (see Owner's acceleration, abrupt cornering, and are more efficient when warmed Maintenance Checks on page 250). hard braking increase fuel up) For example: consumption.

● Driving with a heavy load or the air ● Use the recommended viscosity ● Observe the speed limit － conditioner running motor oil, displaying the API Aerodynamic drag has a big effect Certification Seal (see page on fuel mileage at speeds above 45 ● Improperly inflated tires 253). mph (75 km/h). Reduce your speed and you reduce the drag. ● Maintain proper tire inflation － An under-inflated tire increases Trailers, car top carriers, roof ‘‘ rolling resistance, ’’ which racks and bike racks are also big reduces fuel economy. contributors to increased drag. ● Always drive in the highest gear ● Avoid carrying excess weight in － If your vehicle has a your vehicle － It puts a heavier possible load on the engine, increasing fuel manual transmission, you can consumption. boost your fuel economy by up shifting as early as possible.

204 2009 Fit Fuel Economy

● Avoid excessive idling － Idling Checking Your Fuel Economy results in 0 miles per gallon.

● Minimize the use of the air conditioning system － The A/C puts an extra load on the engine which makes it use more fuel. Use Miles Gallons Miles per the fresh-air ventilation when driven of fuel Gallon possible.

● － Driving Before Plan and combine trips L per Combine several short trips into 100 Liter Kilometers 100 km one. A warmed-up engine is more fuel efficient than a cold one. Calculating Fuel Economy Measuring Techniques Direct calculation is the 1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off. recommended source of information 2) Reset trip counter to zero. about your actual fuel economy. Using frequency of fill-ups or taking 3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill. fuel gauge readings are NOT 4) Follow one of the simple calculations above. accurate measures of fuel economy. Fuel economy may improve over the first several thousand miles.

2009 Fit 205 Accessories and Modifications

Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory: some non-Honda accessories, can ● Make sure the accessory does not make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere modifications or add any accessories, with proper vehicle operation or be sure to read the following vehicle's handling, stability, and performance. information. performance, and cause a crash in which you can be hurt ● Be sure electronic accessories do Accessories or killed. not overload electrical circuits (see Your dealer has Honda accessories page 307) or interfere with proper that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this operation of your vehicle. vehicle. These accessories have been owner's manual regarding designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. ● Before installing any electronic vehicle, and are covered by warranty. accessory, have the installer contact your dealer for assistance. Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular If possible, have your dealer may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and inspect the final installation. meet factory specifications, and could low-powered audio systems should adversely affect your vehicle's not interfere with your vehicle's ● Do not install accessories on the handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such side pillars or across the rear as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and windows. Accessories installed in tire pressure monitoring system (if these areas may interfere with equipped). proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

206 2009 Fit Accessories and Modifications

Modifying Your Vehicle ● Non-Honda wheels, because they Removing parts from your vehicle, or are a universal design, can cause replacing components with non- excessive stress on suspension Honda components could seriously components and will not be affect your vehicle's handling, compatible with the tire pressure stability, and reliability. monitoring system (TPMS)ꭧ. Here are some examples: ꭧ : If equipped

● Lowering your vehicle with a non- ● Larger or smaller wheels and tires Honda suspension kit that can interfere with the operation of Driving Before significantly reduces ground your vehicle's anti-lock brakes and clearance can allow the other systems. undercarriage to hit speed bumps ● Modifying your steering wheel or or other raised objects, which any other part of your vehicle's could cause the airbags to deploy. safety features can make the ● Raising your vehicle with a non- systems ineffective. Honda suspension kit can affect If you plan to modify your vehicle, the handling and stability. consult your dealer.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 207 Carrying Cargo

Your vehicle has several convenient storage areas: CARGO AREA ● Upper glove box

● REAR SIDE POCKET FRONT DOOR POCKETS UPPER GLOVE BOX Lower glove box (RIGHT SIDE) ● Front door pockets

● Seat-back pocket (if equipped)

● Center pocket

● Cargo area side pocket

● Cargo area, including the rear seats when folded up or down.

● Seat under box

● Cargo floor box (all canadian models with automatic transmission) However, carrying too much cargo, CARGO FLOOR BOX*2 SEAT UNDER BOX CENTER POCKET or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's handling, stability,

1 stopping distance, tires, and make it SEAT-BACK POCKET* LOWER GLOVE BOX unsafe. Before carrying any type of ꭧ1: If equipped cargo, be sure to read the following ꭧ2: All Canadian models with automatic transmission pages.

208 2009 Fit Carrying Cargo

Load Limits (Payload) Label Example Steps for Determining Correct Load The maximum load for your vehicle Limit － is 850 lbs (385 kg). (1) Locate the statement ‘‘ The See Tire And Loading Information combined weight of occupants and label attached to the driver's cargo should never exceed XXX kg doorjamb. or XXX lbs. ’’ on your vehicle's placard. (2) Determine the combined weight This figure includes the total weight of the driver and passengers that will Driving Before of all occupants, cargo, and be riding in your vehicle. accessories, and the tongue load if (3) Subtract the combined weight of you are towing a trailer. the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 209 Carrying Cargo

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, Example 1 if the ‘‘ XXX ’’ amount equals 1,400 Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. (150 lbs ꭦ 2 ＝ 300 lbs) (550 lbs) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 － 750 (5 ꭦ 150) ＝ 650 lbs.) Example 2 Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight (5) Determine the combined weight (150 lbs ꭦ 4 ＝ 600 lbs) (250 lbs) of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Example 3 Step 4. Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight ꭦ ＝ (6) If your vehicle will be towing a (150 lbs 5 750 lbs) (100 lbs) trailer, load from your trailer will be In addition, the total weight of the transferred to your vehicle. Consult vehicle, all occupants, accessories, this manual to determine how this cargo, and trailer tongue load must reduces the available cargo and not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver's doorjamb.

210 2009 Fit Carrying Cargo

Carrying Cargo in the Passenger ● If you fold the rear seats up or Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area Compartment down, tie down items that could be ● Distribute cargo evenly on the ● Store or secure all items that could thrown about the vehicle during a floor of the cargo area, placing the be thrown around and hurt crash or sudden stop. Also, keep heaviest items on the bottom and someone during a crash. all cargo below the bottom of the as far forward as possible. Tie windows. If it is higher, it could down items that could be thrown ● Be sure items placed on the floor interfere with the proper operation about the vehicle during a crash or behind the front seats cannot roll of the side curtain airbags. sudden stop. under the seats and interfere with ●

the driver's ability to operate the Do not stack items higher than the Driving Before pedals, the proper operation of the back of the rear seats. They can seats, or proper operation of the block your view and be thrown sensors under the seats. around the vehicle during a crash.

● Keep the upper and lower glove ● If you carry large items that boxes closed while driving. If it is prevent you from closing the open, a passenger could injure tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the their knees during a crash or passenger area. To avoid the sudden stop. possibility of carbon monoxide poisoning, follow the instructions on page 53.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 211 Carrying Cargo

Cargo Hooks HOOKꭧ

ꭧ: If equipped HOOK Your vehicle also has cargo hooks on side panel in the cargo area. The two or four hooks on the floor They are designed to hold light can be used to install a net for items. Heavy objects may damage securing items. the hook. Make sure any items put on each hook weigh less than 2.2 lbs (1 kg).

212 2009 Fit Driving

This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines...... 214 starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ...... 215 conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine ...... 216 manual and automatic transmissions. Manual Transmission ...... 217 It also includes important information Automatic Transmission ...... 219 on parking your vehicle, the braking Driving with the Paddle Shifters system, the vehicle stability assist (Sport only)...... 224 (VSA®), and the tire pressure Parking ...... 229 monitoring system (TPMS). Braking System ...... 230 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...... 231

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), Driving aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System...... 233 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...... 235 Towing a Trailer...... 238 Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome...... 238

2009 Fit 213 2009 Fit Curbs and steep inclines could damage the front and rear bumpers. Low curbs that doaffect not the average vehicle mayhigh be enough to hit theyour bumper vehicle. on The front orbumper rear may scrape when tryingdrive to onto an incline, suchsteep as driveway a or trailer ramps. ● can ’’ speed bumps ‘‘ Use caution if you evervehicle drive on your very rough orroads. rutted You could damage the suspension and underbody by bottoming out. Going too fastparking over lot also cause damage. ● Your vehicle is designed tooptimum give handling you and performance on well-maintained roads. As partthis of design, your vehicle hasminimum a of ground clearance. Driving Guidelines On Sport model 214 Preparing to Drive

You should do the following checks 5. Check the seat adjustment (see and adjustments before you drive page 93). your vehicle. 6. Check the adjustment of the inside 1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, and outside mirrors (see page and outside lights are clean and 101). unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, 7. Check the steering wheel or ice. adjustment (see page 77). 2. Check that the hood is fully 8. Make sure the doors and the closed. tailgate are securely closed and

3. Visually check the tires. If a tire locked. Driving looks low, use a gauge to check its 9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that pressure (see page 273). your passengers have fastened 4. Check that any items you may be their seat belts (see page 14). carrying are stored properly or 10. When you start the engine, check fastened down securely. the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel (see page 59).

2009 Fit 215 Starting the Engine

1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Without touching the accelerator 6. If the engine fails to start, press pedal, turn the ignition key to the the accelerator pedal all the way 2. In cold weather, turn off all START (III) position. Do not hold down, and hold it there while electrical accessories to reduce the the key in the START (III) position starting to clear flooding. If the drain on the battery. for more than 15 seconds at a time. engine still does not start, return to 3. Manual transmission: If the engine does not start right step 5. Press the clutch pedal down all the away, pause for at least 10 seconds way. The START (III) position before trying again. does not function unless the clutch pedal is pressed. The engine is harder to start in cold Automatic transmission: weather. Also, the thinner air found at Make sure the shift lever is in The immobilizer system protects your altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 Park. Press on the brake pedal. vehicle from theft. If an improperly- meters) adds to this problem. coded key (or other device) is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled. For more information, see page 79.

5. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, or starts but stalls right away, repeat step 4 with the accelerator pedal pressed halfway down. If the engine starts, release pressure on the accelerator pedal so the engine does not race.

216 2009 Fit Manual Transmission

Come to a full stop before you shift into reverse. You can damage the transmission by trying to shift into Rapid slowing or speeding up reverse with the vehicle moving. can cause loss of control on Push down the clutch pedal, and slippery surfaces. If you crash, pause for a few seconds before you can be injured. shifting into reverse, or shift into one Use extra care when driving on of the forward gears for a moment. slippery surfaces. This stops the gears so they won't ‘‘ grind. ’’

When slowing down, you can get Driving extra braking from the engine by The manual transmission is shifting to a lower gear. This extra synchronized in all forward gears for braking can help you maintain a safe smooth operation. It has a lockout so speed and prevent your brakes from you cannot shift directly from fifth to overheating while going down a reverse. When shifting up or down, steep hill. Before downshifting, make make sure you push the clutch pedal sure the engine speed will not go down all the way, shift to the next into the tachometer's red zone in the gear, and let the pedal up gradually. lower gear. When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause the clutch to wear out faster.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 217 Manual Transmission

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter Drive in the highest gear that lets the If you exceed the maximum speed engine run and accelerate smoothly. for the gear you are in, the engine This will give you good fuel economy speed will enter into the and effective emissions control. The tachometer's red zone. If this occurs, following shift points are you may feel the engine cut in and recommended: out. This is caused by a limiter in the engine's computer controls. The Shift up Normal acceleration engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone. 1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h) The engine speed limiter only works 2nd to 3rd 27 mph (43 km/h) when you upshift; engine speed is 3rd to 4th 39 mph (62 km/h) not limited during downshifts. Before 4th to 5th 53 mph (85 km/h) downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometer's red zone.

218 2009 Fit Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting SHIFT LEVER

All models except U.S. Sport RELEASE Driving BUTTON U.S. Sport model If the malfunction indicator lamp U.S. Sport model is shown comes on along with the ‘‘ D ’’ These indicators on the instrument indicator, there is a problem with the To shift from Park to any position, panel show which position the shift automatic transmission control press firmly on the brake pedal and lever is in. system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and press the release button on the front The ‘‘ D ’’ indicator comes on for a have the transmission checked by of the shift lever, then pull the lever. few seconds when you turn the your dealer as soon as possible. You cannot shift out of Park when ignition switch to the ON (II) the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. If it flashes while driving (in (0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position. any shift position), it indicates a possible problem in the transmission.

CONTINUED 2009 Fit 219 on This position － Shift Lock Release page 223 . To avoid transmission damage, come to a complete stop beforeinto shifting Park. You must alsorelease press button the to shift intoshift Park. lever The must be inyou Park can before remove the keyignition from switch. the Park (P) mechanically locks the transmission. Use Park whenever you areoff turning or starting the engine.of To Park, shift you out must presspedal on and the have brake your footaccelerator off pedal. the Press the release button on the front ofto the move shift it. lever If you have done allstill of cannot the move above the and leverPark, out see of Do this: Move the shift lever. Press the shift lever release button. Press the brake pedal, and press the shift lever release button. 2009 Fit PtoR RtoP DtoS StoD NtoR RtoN DtoN NtoD To shift from:

U.S. Sport model Do this: Move the shift lever. Press the shift lever release button. Press the brake pedal, and press the shift lever release button. 3 3 to 2 to D 3 3 2to1 1to2 PtoR RtoP RtoN NtoR DtoN NtoD 2toD D DtoD D To shift from:

Automatic Transmission All models except U.S. Sport 220 Automatic Transmission

Reverse (R) － Press the brake Drive (D) － Use this position for All models except U.S. Sport pedal and press the release button on your normal driving. The Second (2) － To shift to second, the front of the shift lever to shift transmission automatically selects a press the release button on the front from Park to reverse. To shift from suitable gear (1 through 5) for your of the shift lever. This position locks reverse to neutral, come to a speed and acceleration. You may the transmission in second gear. It complete stop, and then shift. Press notice the transmission shifting up at does not downshift to first gear when the release button before shifting higher engine speeds when the you come to a stop. into reverse from neutral. engine is cold. This helps the engine Use second gear: warm up faster. Neutral (N) － Use neutral if you ● For more power when climbing. need to restart a stalled engine, or if All models except U.S. Sport ● it is necessary to stop briefly with the Drive (D3) － This position is similar To increase engine braking when Driving engine idling. Shift to the Park to D, except only the first three gears going down steep hills. position if you need to leave your are selected. Use D3 to provide ● For starting out on a slippery vehicle for any reason. Press on the engine braking when going down a surface or in deep snow. brake pedal when you are moving steep hill. D3 can also keep the the shift lever from neutral to transmission from cycling between ● To help reduce wheel spin. another gear. third and fourth gears in stop-and-go driving.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 221 Engine Speed Limiter If you exceed the maximumfor speed the gear you arespeed in, will the enter engine into the tachometer's red zone. If thisyou occurs, may feel the engineout. cut This in is and caused byengine's a computer limiter controls. in The the engine will run normally whenreduce you the rpm below the red zone. To shift into the S － 2009 Fit 224 . S position (S) U.S. Sport model position, press the release buttonthe on front of the shiftthe lever, lever and to move S. Thisto position D, is except similar only gearsfourth from are first selected. to The Skeeps position the transmission from cycling between fourth and fifth gearsstop-and-go in driving. With the shift lever incan D also or use S, the you paddleshift shifters the to transmission up orWith down. the paddle shifters, youoperate can the transmission much likemanual a transmission without a clutch pedal. For more information on driving with the paddle shifters,page see , and D, you can 3 To shift from second to － operate the transmission much likemanual a transmission without a clutch pedal. first, press the release buttonfront on of the the shift lever.locks This the position transmission in firstBy gear. upshifting and downshifting through 1, 2, D Automatic Transmission All models except U.S. Sport First (1) 222 Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Release COVER RELEASE BUTTON This allows you to move the shift lever out of Park if the normal method of pushing on the brake pedal and pressing the release button does not work. 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. NOTCH

3. Put a cloth on the notch of the shift Driving SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT lock release slot cover. Using a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a 4. Insert the key in the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift lock metal fingernail file, carefully pry release slot. release slot, then reinstall the on the notch of the cover to 5. Push down on the key while you cover. Make sure the notch on the remove it. press the release button on the cover is on the left side. Press the shift lever and move the shift lever brake pedal, and restart the out of Park to neutral. engine. If you need to use the shift lock release, it means your vehicle is developing a problem. Have it checked by your dealer.

2009 Fit 223 Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)

Using the Paddle Shifters in D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode) U.S. models only When you are driving in D position, you can shift the transmission up or down manually with the paddle shifters.

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR To shift up or down, use the ＋ Each time you pull the ＋ (right) (right) or － (left) paddle shifter on paddle, the transmission shifts to a each side of the steering wheel. higher gear. Pull the － (left) paddle to downshift. You will see the selected gear number on the instrument panel. When you pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator shows you the selected gear number. When the transmission returns to drive mode (D), the displayed gear number disappears.

224 2009 Fit Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)

Downshifting with the paddle shifter The transmission remains in the To shift Speed range allows you to increase the engine selected gear if you do not from braking when going down steep or accelerate. long hills, and provides more power Each time you pull either paddle → when climbing uphills. You can 5 4 under 112 mph shifter, the transmission shifts one upshift the transmission manually to (181 km/h) gear up or down. If you want to shift reduce the rpm. Driving in the up or down more than two gears, pull higher gear helps fuel economy. 4 → 3 under 79 mph (127 km/h) the paddle shifter twice, pause, and The transmission control system then pull it again. 3 → 2 under 51 mph (82 km/h) monitors the accelerator pedal use The automatic transmission will not and your driving conditions. When Driving allow you to shift up or down if: → you press the accelerator pedal as in 2 1 under 20 mph (32 km/h) normal driving, the system judges ● You downshift before the engine that you are driving at a constant speed falls below the upper limit of ● You upshift before the engine cruising speed without using the the lower gear. speed rises above the lower limit paddle shifters. Under these of the higher gear. If you try to do this, the gear position conditions, D-paddle shift mode is ● indicator will flash the number of the You pull both paddle shifters at the canceled, and the transmission lower gear several times, then return same time. automatically returns to drive mode to a higher gear. (D). The transmission downshifts to first Here are the speed ranges for gear and returns to drive mode (D) downshifting. when the vehicle comes to a complete stop or the vehicle speed is about 6 mph (10 km/h).

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 225 Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)

When you pull and hold the ＋ Using the Paddle Shift in S GEAR POSITION INDICATOR (right) paddle shifter, the position (Sequential Shift Mode) transmission automatically returns to U.S. models only drive mode (D). With the shift lever in the S position, If there is a problem in the you can manually shift up or down transmission while you are driving with the paddle shifters. The with the paddle shifters, the D transmission goes into the sequential indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift shift mode and holds the selected mode is canceled, and the gear. transmission returns to drive mode To enter the sequential shift mode, (D). ‘‘ ’’ press the release button on the front M INDICATOR of the shift lever, move the lever to When you move the shift lever from the S position, then pull either paddle ‘‘ D ’’ to the ‘‘ S ’’ position and pull shifter. To return to drive mode (D), either paddle shifter, the gear move the shift lever to the D position indicator displays ‘‘ M ’’ position. While you are driving in the along with the selected gear number. sequential shift mode, the ＋ transmission will not automatically To upshift, pull the (right) paddle － return to drive mode (D). shifter. To downshift, pull the (left) paddle shifter.

226 2009 Fit Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)

When you accelerate from a stop, the Downshifting with the paddle shifter If the vehicle speed decreases below transmission starts in first gear, and allows you to increase the engine the redline of the selected lower gear you must manually upshift between braking when going down steep or while the indicator is flashing, the first and fifth gears. Make sure you long hills, and provides more power transmission downshifts, and the upshift before the engine speed when climbing uphills. You can indicator displays the selected gear. reaches the tachometer's red zone. upshift the transmission manually to ● You upshift before the engine reduce the rpm. Driving in the The transmission remains in the speed rises above the lower limit higher gear helps fuel economy. selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There of the higher gear. is no automatic downshift when you The transmission also shifts ● You pull both paddle shifters at the push the accelerator pedal to the automatically as the vehicle comes to same time. floor. a complete stop. It downshifts to first Driving gear when the vehicle speed reaches When you are driving in 4th or 5th 6 mph (10 km/h) or less. gear, the transmission downshifts to the lower gear under the following The automatic transmission will not conditions: allow you to shift up or down if:

● The vehicle slows down to a ● You downshift before the engine certain speed. speed falls below the upper limit of the lower gear. ● You press the brake pedal. If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 227 Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)

Here are the speed ranges for Starting in Second Gear upshifting and downshifting. When you are in sequential shift mode, and the vehicle is stopped, To shift Speed range pull the ＋ (right) paddle shifter to from shift to second gear. You will see ‘‘ M2 ’’ in the display. Starting in 1 → 2 over 0 mph (0 km/h) second gear helps to reduce wheelspin in deep snow or on a 2 → 3 over 6 mph (10 km/h) slippery surface.

3 → 4 over 21 mph (34 km/h)

4 → 5 over 27 mph (44 km/h)

To shift Speed range from

2 → 1 under 26 mph (42 km/h)

3 → 2 under 51 mph (82 km/h)

4 → 3 under 79 mph (127 km/h)

228 2009 Fit Parking

Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips ● If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn you park your vehicle. Make sure the ● Make sure the windows are the front wheels away from the parking brake is set firmly, or your closed. curb. If your vehicle has a manual vehicle may roll if it is parked on an transmission, put it in first gear ● Turn off the lights. incline. and set the parking brake. ● Place any packages, valuables, etc. If your vehicle has an automatic ● If the vehicle is facing downhill, in the cargo area or take them with transmission, set the parking brake turn the front wheels toward the you. before you put the transmission in curb. If your vehicle has a manual Park. This keeps the vehicle from ● Lock the doors and the tailgate. transmission, put it in reverse gear moving and putting pressure on the and set the parking brake. On Sport model parking mechanism in the Driving Check the indicator on the ● Make sure the parking brake is transmission. instrument panel to verify that the fully released before driving away. security system is set. Driving with the parking brake partially set can overheat or ● Never park over dry leaves, tall damage the rear brakes. grass, or other flammable materials. The hot three way catalytic converter could cause these materials to catch on fire.

2009 Fit 229 Braking System

Your vehicle is equipped with front Check your brakes after driving Brake Pad Wear Indicators disc brakes. The brakes on the rear through deep water. Apply the If the front brake pads need wheels are drum. A power assist brakes moderately to see if they feel replacing, you will hear a distinctive, helps reduce the effort needed on the normal. If not, apply them gently and metallic screeching sound when you brake pedal. The anti-lock brake frequently until they do. Be extra apply the brake pedal. If you do not system (ABS) helps you retain cautious and alert in your driving. have the brake pads replaced, they steering control when braking very will screech all the time. It is normal Braking System Design hard. The hydraulic system that operates for the brakes to occasionally squeal or squeak when you apply them. Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes has two separate circuits. the brakes applied lightly, builds up Each circuit works diagonally across heat, and reduces their effectiveness the vehicle (the left-front brake is and reduces brake pad life. In connected with the right-rear brake, addition, fuel economy can be etc.). If one circuit should develop a reduced. It also keeps your brake problem, you will still have braking lights on all the time, confusing at two wheels. drivers behind you. Constant application of the brakes when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the brakes by taking your foot off the accelerator and downshifting to a lower gear.

230 2009 Fit Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake ABS Indicator helps prevent the wheels from pedal when the ABS activates, and locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is If the ABS indicator comes on, the steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly anti-lock function of the braking brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry system has shut down. The brakes person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on still work like a conventional system, the brake pedal very hard before the The electronic brake distribution but without anti-lock. You should ABS activates. However, you may (EBD) system, which is part of the have your dealer inspect your vehicle feel the ABS activate immediately if ABS, also balances the front-to-rear as soon as possible. you are trying to stop on snow or ice. braking distribution according to If the ABS indicator comes on while vehicle loading. driving, test the brakes as shown on Driving You should never pump the brake pedal. page 305. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as ‘‘ stomp and steer. ’’

CONTINUED 2009 Fit 231 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a system indicator come on together, longer distance to stop on loose or and the parking brake is fully ABS does not reduce the time or uneven surfaces, such as gravel or released, the EBD system may also distance it takes to stop the snow, than a vehicle without anti- be shut down. vehicle. It only helps with the lock. steering control during braking. Test your brakes as instructed on page 305. If the brakes feel normal, ABS will not prevent a skid that drive slowly and have your vehicle results from changing direction repaired by your dealer as soon as abruptly, such as trying to take a possible. Avoid sudden hard braking corner too fast or making a sudden which could cause the rear wheels to lane change. Always drive at a safe lock up and possibly lead to a loss of speed for the road and weather control. conditions. On vehicles with VSA system ABS cannot prevent a loss of The VSA indicator will come on stability. Always steer moderately along with the ABS indicator. when you are braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.

232 2009 Fit Driving 233

CONTINUED If the indicator does notwhen come the on ignition switch isthe turned ON to (II) position, thereproblem may with be the a VSA system.your Have dealer inspect your vehiclesoon as as possible. If the low tire pressureTPMS indicator indicator or comes on, thesystem VSA automatically turns on eventhe if VSA system is turnedpressing off the by VSA OFF switchpage (see 234 ). If this happens,cannot you turn the VSA systempressing off the by VSA OFF switch again. Without VSA, your vehicle willnormal have braking and cornering ability, but it will not havestability VSA enhancement. traction and 2009 Fit ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System ® VSA Off Indicator Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator The main function of the VSA When VSA is off, theindicator VSA comes off on as a reminder. When VSA activates, you willVSA see system the indicator blink. If this indicator comes ondriving, while pull to the sidewhen of it the is road safe, andengine. turn Reset off the the system by restarting the engine. If thesystem VSA indicator stays on orback comes on while driving, havesystem the inspected VSA by your dealer. NOTE: system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes acontrol traction function. Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA

If equipped The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps to stabilize theduring vehicle cornering if the vehiclemore turns or less than desired.assists It you also in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. It doesregulating this the by engine's output andselectively by applying the brakes. When VSA activates, you maythat notice the engine does notthe respond accelerator to in the samedoes way at it other times. Therebe may some also noise from thehydraulic VSA system. You will alsothe see VSA system indicator blink. The VSA system cannot enhancevehicle's the driving stability in all situations and does not controlvehicle's your entire braking system. Itstill is your responsibility to drivecorner and at reasonable speeds andleave to a sufficient margin of safety. Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

VSA Off Switch VSA is turned on every time you start VSA and Tire Sizes the engine, even if you turned it off Driving with varying tire or wheel VSA OFF SWITCH the last time you drove the vehicle. sizes may cause the VSA to malfunction. When replacing tires, In certain unusual conditions when make sure they are the same size your vehicle gets stuck in shallow and type as your original tires (see mud or fresh snow, it may be easier page 277). to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off. When the VSA system If you install winter tires, make sure is off, the traction control system is they are the same size as those that also off. You should only attempt to were originally supplied with your free your vehicle with the VSA off if vehicle. Exercise the same caution you are not able to free it when the during winter driving as you would if VSA is on. your vehicle was not equipped with VSA. This switch is under the driver's side Immediately after freeing your beverage holder. To turn the VSA vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on system on and off, press and hold it again. We do not recommend driving until you hear a beep. your vehicle with the VSA and When VSA is off, the VSA off traction control systems switched off. indicator comes on as a reminder. Press and hold the switch again. It turns the system back on.

234 2009 Fit Driving 235

CONTINUED If you cannot make thepressure low indicator tire go out after inflating the tires to thevalues, specified have your dealer checksystem the as soon as possible. Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tireoverheat to and can lead toUnder-inflation tire also failure. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,affect and the may vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Because tire pressure varies by temperature and other conditions, the low tire pressure indicatorcome may on unexpectedly. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 2009 Fit Low Tire Pressure Indicator When the low tire pressureis indicator on, one or moresignificantly of underinflated. your You tires is should stop and check yoursoon tires as as possible, and inflatethe them proper to pressure as indicatedthe on vehicle's tire information placard. If you think you canshort safely distance drive to a a serviceproceed station, slowly, and inflate thethe tire recommended to pressure shown on the driver's doorjamb. If the tire is flat,is or too if low the to tire continuethe pressure driving, tire replace with the compact(see spare page tire 284 ).

U.S. models only Your vehicle is equipped withpressure a monitoring tire system (TPMS) that turns on every timeengine you and start monitors the the pressureyour in tires while driving. Each tire has its own(not pressure including sensor the spare tire).air If pressure the of a tiresignificantly becomes low, the sensor intire that immediately sends a signalcauses that the low tire pressureto indicator come on. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

For example, if you check and fill Each tire, including the spare, should When you restart the vehicle with your tires in a warm area, then drive be checked monthly when cold, and the compact spare tire, the TPMS in extremely cold weather, the tire set to the recommended inflation indicator may also come on and stay pressure will be lower than pressure as specified on the tire on after driving several miles measured and could be underinflated information label and in the owner's (kilometers). and cause the low tire pressure manual (see page 274). indicator to come on. Or, if you check and adjust your tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring in cooler conditions, and drive into System (TPMS) Indicator extremely hot conditions, the tire This indicator comes on and stays on may become overinflated. However, if there is a problem with the tire the low tire pressure indicator will pressure monitoring system. not come on if the tires are If this happens, the system will shut overinflated. off and no longer monitor tire Refer to page 273 for tire inflation pressures. Have the system checked guidelines. by your dealer as soon as possible. Although your tire pressure is If the low tire pressure indicator or monitored, you must manually check TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA ꭧ the tire pressures monthly. system automatically turns on even if the VSA system is turned off by pressing the VSA OFF switchꭧ (see page 234). If this happens, you cannnot turn the VSA system off by pressig the VSA off switch again. ꭧ: If equipped

236 2009 Fit Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Changing a Tire with TPMS The low tire pressure indicator or the As required by the FCC: This device If you have a flat tire, the low tire TPMS indicator will go off, after complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. pressure indicator will come on. several miles (kilometers) driving, Operation is subject to the following two Replace the flat tire with the compact when you replace the spare tire with conditions: (1) This device may not spare tire (see page 284). the specified regular tire equipped cause harmful interference, and (2) this with the tire pressure monitor device must accept any interference Each wheel (except the compact received, including interference that may sensor. spare tire wheel) is equipped with a cause undesired operation. tire pressure sensor mounted inside Never use a puncture-repairing agent Changes or modifications not expressly the tire behind the valve stem. You in a flat tire. If used, you will have to approved by the party responsible for must use TPMS specific wheels. It is replace the tire pressure sensor. compliance could void the user's recommended that you always have Have the flat tire repaired by your authority to operate the equipment. Driving your tires serviced by your dealer or dealer as soon as possible. qualified technician. This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is After you replace the flat tire with the subject to the following two conditions: compact spare tire, the low tire (1) this device may not cause pressure indicator stays on. This is interference, and (2) this device must normal; the system is not monitoring accept any interference that may cause the spare tire pressure. Manually undesired operation of the device. check the spare tire pressure to be sure it is correct. After several miles (kilometers) driving with the compact spare tire, the TPMS indicator comes on and the low tire pressure indicator goes off.

2009 Fit 237 Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Towing a Trailer Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Automatic transmission: Your vehicle is not designed to tow a Motorhome Perform the following procedure trailer. Attempting to do so can void Your vehicle can be towed behind a every day immediately before you your warranties. motorhome at legal highway speeds begin towing. Otherwise severe up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not automatic transmission damage will exceed 65 mph (100 km/h). occur. Otherwise, severe transmission 1. Check the transmission fluid level damage will occur. (see page 259). Do not overfill. When purchasing a tow bar, make 2. Start the engine. sure you select a reputable manufacturer and installer. Follow 3. Press on the brake pedal. Move the manufacturer's attachment the shift lever through all its instructions carefully. positions. 4. Shift to the D position and hold for 5 seconds, then to N. Let the engine run for 3 minutes, then turn The steering system can be damaged if it off. the steering wheel is locked. Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position, and make sure the steering wheel turns freely before you begin Severe transmission damage will occur towing. if the vehicle is shifted from reverse to neutral and then towed with the drive wheels on the ground.

238 2009 Fit Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

5. Release the parking brake. Extended Towing When towing your vehicle for long If you tow more than 8 hours in one periods, remove the 20A Accessory Manual transmission: day, you should repeat the above Socket and 30A Radio fuses to 1. Move the shifter into the Neutral procedure at least every 8 hours reduce drain on battery. These fuses position. (when you stop for fuel, etc.) are located in the interior fuse box 2. Release the parking brake. and are shown as number 13 and 61 below. Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position so the Failure to follow the recommended steering wheel does not lock. Make instructions exactly will result in severe sure the radio and any items plugged automatic transmission damage. If you into the accessory power sockets are cannot shift the transmission or start Driving turned off so you do not run down the engine, your vehicle must be the battery. transported on a flat-bed truck or When you stop towing your vehicle trailer. and shift out of the neutral position, you may not be able to move the shift lever from neutral to reverse or Park. If this happens, press the brake pedal and turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, then shift out of neutral.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 239 Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

ACCESSORY SOCKET FUSE Only remove the fuses after you have On vehicles with navigation system performed the transmission shifting The navigation system will also procedure, and the key is in the disable itself. The next time you turn ACCESSORY (I) position. Store the on the ignition switch, the system fuses in an obvious location (center will require you to enter ‘‘ ENTER pocket, etc) as a reminder to re- CODE ’’ before it can be used. Refer install the fuses before driving the to the navigation system manual. vehicle. On vehicles without navigation system If the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio you will see ‘‘ ENTER CODE ’’ in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the code (see page 191). When the audio system is disabled, the clock setting in the audio system will be canceled. You will need to reset the clock (see page 192).

RADIO FUSE

240 2009 Fit Driving 241 Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 2009 Fit

Automatic transmission If you tow a Fitthe behind transmission a fluid motorhome, must be changed every 2 years ormiles 30,000 (48,000 km), whichever comes first. 242 2009 Fit Maintenance

This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety...... 244 important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ...... 245 maintained and how to follow basic Fluid Locations ...... 252 maintenance safety precautions. Adding Engine Oil ...... 253 Changing the Engine Oil and This section also includes Filter ...... 254 instructions on how to read the Engine Coolant ...... 256 maintenance minder messages on Windshield Washers...... 258 the information display, and Transmission Fluid ...... 259 instructions for simple maintenance Automatic Transmission tasks you may want to take care of Fluid ...... 259 yourself. Manual Transmission Fluid .... 260 If you have the skills and tools to Brake and Clutch Fluid ...... 261 Maintenance perform more complex maintenance Lights...... 262 tasks on your vehicle, you may want Cleaning the Seat Belts ...... 267 to purchase the service manual. See Floor Mats ...... 267 page 335 for information on how to Audio Antenna ...... 268 obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Dust and Pollen Filter ...... 268 Wiper Blades ...... 269 Tires ...... 273 Checking the Battery ...... 279 Vehicle Storage...... 281

2009 Fit 243 Maintenance Safety

All service items not detailed in this ● Injury from moving parts. Do section should be performed by a not run the engine unless certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so. mechanic. vehicle, or failing to correct a problem before driving can Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed. the instructions before you begin, Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection and skills required. precautions can cause you to and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed. ● Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owner's Always follow the procedures is set, and the engine is off. manual. and precautions in this owner's ● To clean parts, use a commercially manual. available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards ● cleaner, not gasoline. Carbon Monoxide poison from Some of the most important safety engine exhaust. Be sure there is ● To reduce the possibility of fire or precautions are given here. However, adequate ventilation whenever you we cannot warn you of every explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, operate the engine. and flames away from the battery conceivable hazard that can arise in and all fuel-related parts. ● Burns from hot parts. Let the performing maintenance. Only you engine and exhaust system cool can decide whether or not you ● Wear eye protection and protective down before touching any parts. should perform a given task. clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.

244 2009 Fit Maintenance Minder

Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is and maintenance service items on shown on the display according to the information display to show you SELECT/RESET KNOB this table: when you should have your dealer Calculated Engine Displayed perform engine oil replacement and Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%) indicated maintenance service. 100%－91% 100% Based on the engine operating 90%－81% 90% conditions and accumulated engine 80%－71% 80% revolutions, the onboard computer in － your vehicle calculates the remaining 70% 61% 70% engine oil life and displays it as a 60%－51% 60% percentage. 50%－41% 50% ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR 40%－31% 40% Maintenance To see the current engine oil life, 30%－21% 30% turn the ignition switch to the ON 20%－16% 20% (II) position, then press and release － the select/reset knob repeatedly 15% 11% 15% until the engine oil life indicator 10%－6% 10% appears (see page 68). 5%－1% 5% 0% 0%

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 245 Maintenance Minder

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

MAINTENANCE ENGINE OIL LIFE MINDER INDICATOR INDICATOR If the remaining engine oil life is 15 The 15 and 11 percent oil life When the remaining engine oil life is to 6 percent, you will see the engine indicator reminds you that the time is 5 to 1 percent, you will see a oil life indicator every time you turn coming soon to take your vehicle in ‘‘ SERVICE ’’ message along with the the ignition switch to the ON (II) for the required maintenance. same maintenance item code(s), position. The maintenance minder every time you turn the ignition indicator will also come on, and the switch to the ON (II) position. maintenance item code(s) for other scheduled maintenance items needing service will be displayed above the ‘‘ OIL LIFE ’’ message.

246 2009 Fit Maintenance Minder

The maintenance item code or codes indicate the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change (see page 248). You can switch the information display from the engine oil life display to the odometer or the trip meter. Press and release the select/ reset knob on the instrument panel. When the engine oil life is 15 to 1 percent, the maintenance minder NEGATIVE MILEAGE

indicator ( ) comes on every time When the remaining engine oil life is If you do not perform the indicated Maintenance you turn the ignition switch to the 0 percent, the engine oil life indicator maintenance, negative mileage is ON (II) position, then it goes out if will blink. The display comes on displayed and begins to blink after you switch the information display. every time you turn the ignition the vehicle has been driven 10 miles When you see this message, have switch to the ON (II) position. The (10 km) or more. maintenance minder indicator ( ) the indicated maintenance performed Negative mileage means your vehicle also comes on and remains on in the by your dealer as soon as possible. has passed the maintenance required instrument panel. When you see this point. message, immediately have the Immediately have the indicated indicated maintenance done by your maintenance done by your dealer. dealer.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 247 Maintenance Minder

To change the information display Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life from the engine oil life display to the Items Display odometer, the trip meter or average Your dealer will reset the display fuel mileage, press and release the MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM after completing the required select/reset knob. maintenance service. You will see ‘‘ OIL LIFE 100% ’’ on the information When the engine oil life is 0 percent display the next time you turn the or negative mileage, the maintenance ignition switch to the ON (II) minder indicator ( ) remains on position. even if you change the information display. If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer, Immediately have the service reset the maintenance minder as performed, and make sure to reset follows: the display as described. MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S) 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON All maintenance items displayed on (II) position. the information display are in code. For an explanation of these 2. Press the select/reset knob maintenance codes, see page 251. repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed.

248 2009 Fit Maintenance Minder

Important Maintenance Precautions If you have the required service done but do not reset the display, or reset the display without doing the service, the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because you will no longer have an accurate record of when maintenance is needed. Your authorized Honda dealer knows 3. Press the select/reset knob for 4. Press the select/reset knob for your vehicle best and can provide Maintenance about 10 seconds. The engine oil another 5 seconds. The competent, efficient service. life and the maintenance item maintenance item code(s) will code(s) will blink. disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to ‘‘ 100. ’’

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 249 Maintenance Minder

However, service at a dealer is not U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance, ● Engine oil level － Check every mandatory to keep your warranties in replacement, or repair of time you fill the fuel tank. See page effect. Maintenance may be done by emissions control devices and 201. any qualified service facility or systems may be done by any ● Engine coolant level － Check the person who is skilled in this type of automotive repair establishment radiator reserve tank every time automotive service. Make sure to or individual using parts that are you fill the fuel tank. See page 202. have the service facility or person ‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards. reset the display as previously ● Automatic transmission － Check According to state and federal described. Keep all receipts as proof the fluid level monthly. See page regulations, failure to perform of completion, and have the person 259. maintenance on the items marked who does the work fill out your with＃will not void your emissions ● Brakes － Check the fluid level Honda Service History or Canadian warranties. However, all monthly. See page 261. Maintenance Log. Check your maintenance services should be warranty booklet for more ● Tires － Check the tire pressure performed in accordance with the information. monthly. Examine the tread for intervals indicated by the information wear and foreign objects. See page We recommend using Honda parts display. 274. and fluids whenever you have Owner's Maintenance Checks maintenance done. These are ● Lights － Check the operation of You should check the following manufactured to the same high the headlights, parking lights, items at the specified intervals. If you quality standards as the original taillights, high-mount brake light, are unsure of how to perform any components, so you can be confident and license plate lights monthly. check, turn to the appropriate page of their performance and durability. See page 262. listed.

250 2009 Fit Maintenance Minder

Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items A ● Replace engine oilꭧ1 1 ● Rotate tires B ● Replace engine oil and oil filter 2 ● Replace air cleaner element ● Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 ● Check parking brake adjustment miles (24,000 km). ● ● Inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter ● Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high

concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from Minder Maintenance ● Suspension components diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles ● Driveshaft boots (24,000 km). ● Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) ● Inspect drive belt ● All fluid levels and condition of fluids 3 ● Replace transmission fluid ＃ ● Exhaust system Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle ● Fuel lines and connections＃ speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more ꭧ1: If the message ‘‘ SERVICE ’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the frequently than recommended by the maintenance display is reset, change the engine oil every year. minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed at ＃: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 249. 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). (For A/T only) NOTE: ● Independent of maintenance message in the information display, replace If you tow a FIT behind a motorhome, the transmission the brake fluid every 3 years. fluid must be changed every 2 years or 30,000 miles ● Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). (48,000 km), whichever comes first. (For A/T only) ● Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy. 4 ● Replace spark plugs ● Inspect valve clearance 5 ● Replace engine coolant

2009 Fit 251 Fluid Locations

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP BRAKE FLUID (Black cap)

WASHER FLUID (Blue cap) CLUTCH FLUID (Manual Transmission only) (Gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK (Orange loop)

RADIATOR CAP ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)

252 2009 Fit Adding Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil Honda Motor Oil is the preferred Oil is a major contributor to your 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is engine's performance and longevity. highly recommended that you use Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for detergent oil displaying the API optimum engine protection. Make Certification Seal. This seal indicates sure the API Certification Seal says the oil is energy conserving, and that ‘‘ For Gasoline Engines. ’’ it meets the American Petroleum The oil viscosity or weight is Institute's latest requirements. provided on the container's label. 5W-20 oil is formulated for year- API CERTIFICATION SEAL ENGINE OIL FILL CAP round protection of your vehicle to improve cold weather starting and Unscrew and remove the engine oil fuel economy. Maintenance fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled oil could damage components in the engine compartment. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait a few minutes, and recheck the oil level on the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill above the upper mark; you could Ambient Temperature damage the engine.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 253 Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and WASHER You may use a synthetic motor oil if Filter it meets the same requirements Always change the oil and filter given for a conventional motor oil, it according to the maintenance displays the API Certification Seal, messages shown on the information and it is the proper weight. You must display. The oil and filter collect follow the oil and filter change contaminants that can damage your intervals shown on the information engine if they are not removed display. regularly. Engine Oil Additives Changing the oil and filter requires Your vehicle does not require any oil special tools and access from OIL DRAIN BOLT additives. Additives may adversely underneath the vehicle. The vehicle affect the engine or transmission should be raised on a service station- 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, performance and durability. type hydraulic lift for this service. then shut it off. Unless you have the knowledge and proper equipment, you should have 2. Open the hood, and remove the this maintenance done by a skilled engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil mechanic. drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine. Drain the oil into an appropriate container.

254 2009 Fit Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

OIL FILTER 5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. Tighten the drain bolt to: Improper disposal of engine oil can be 29 lbf·ft (39 N·m, 4.0 kgf·m) harmful to the environment. If you change your own oil, please dispose of 6. Refill the engine with the the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed recommended oil. container and take it to a recycling center. Do not discard it in a trash bin Engine oil change capacity or dump it on the ground. (including filter): 3.8 US qt (3.6 L) 7. Replace the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The oil pressure 3. Remove the oil filter, and let the Maintenance remaining oil drain. A special indicator should go out within 5 wrench (available from your seconds. If it does not, turn off the dealer) is required. engine, and check your work. Make sure the oil filter gasket is 8. Let the engine run for several not stuck to the engine block. If it minutes, then check the drain bolt is, remove it before installing a and oil filter for leaks. new oil filter. 9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for 4. Install a new oil filter according to several minutes, then check the oil the instructions that come with it. level on the dipstick. If necessary, Make sure to clean off any dirt and add more oil. dust on the connecting surface of a new oil filter.

2009 Fit 255 Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-life Anti- If the reserve tank is completely freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant empty, you should also check the is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator. antifreeze and 50 percent water. Never add straight antifreeze or plain water. If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not Removing the radiator cap available, you may use another while the engine is hot can major-brand non-silicate coolant as a cause the coolant to spray out, temporary replacement. Make sure it seriously scalding you. is a high-quality coolant recommended for aluminum Always let the engine and RESERVE TANK engines. Continued use of any non- radiator cool down before If the coolant level in the reserve Honda coolant can result in removing the radiator cap. tank is at or below the MIN line, add corrosion, causing the cooling coolant to bring it up to the MAX system to malfunction or fail. Have line. Inspect the cooling system for the cooling system flushed and leaks. refilled with Honda antifreeze/ coolant as soon as possible.

256 2009 Fit Engine Coolant

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank. Fill it halfway between the MAX and MIN marks. Put the cap back on the reserve tank. Do not add any rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or engine components.

RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK

1. Make sure the engine and radiator 4. The coolant level should be up to Maintenance are cool. the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low. 2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling system by turning the radiator cap Pour the coolant slowly and counterclockwise, without carefully so you do not spill any. pressing down. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the 3. Remove the radiator cap by engine compartment. pushing down and turning counterclockwise. 5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.

2009 Fit 257 Windshield Washers

Check the fluid level in the Fill up to here On Canadian models: The low washer windshield washer reservoir at least level indicator comes on when the monthly during normal use. This level is low (see page 65). reservoir supplies the windshield and Fill the reservoir with a good-quality rear window washers. windshield washer fluid. This increases the cleaning capability and prevents freezing in cold weather. When you refill the reservoir, clean the edges of the windshield wiper blades with windshield washer fluid WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR on a clean cloth. This will help to On U.S. models: To check the condition the blade edges. windshield washer fluid level, open the hood and look the windshield washer reservoir located behind the right headlight. You will see a ‘‘ 1/2 ’’ Do not use engine antifreeze or a mark on the reservoir. vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint, while a vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially-available windshield washer fluid.

258 2009 Fit Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid 4. Remove the dipstick, and check DIPSTICK the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. HOT UPPER MARK MARK 5. If the level is below the lower LOWER mark, add fluid into the dipstick MARK hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks. Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) spill immediately; it could damage Maintenance from the transmission, and wipe it components in the engine Check the fluid level with the engine with a clean cloth. compartment. at normal operating temperature. 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into Always use Honda ATF-Z1 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. the transmission securely as (automatic transmission fluid). Start the engine, let it run until the shown in the illustration. radiator fan comes on, then shut off the engine. For accurate results, wait about 60 seconds (but no longer than 90 seconds) before doing step 2.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 259 Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission Fluid Put a new washer on the filler bolt, then reinstall the filler bolt and Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 FILLER BOLT tighten it securely. (Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do not mix with other transmission fluids. If Honda MTF is not available, you Using transmission fluid other than may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause viscosity motor oil with the API deterioration in transmission operation Certification seal that says ‘‘ FOR and durability, and could result in GASOLINE ENGINES ’’ as a damage to the transmission. temporary replacement. However, Damage resulting from the use of motor oil does not contain the proper transmission fluid other than Honda additives, and continued use can Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the Correct level WASHER cause stiffer shifting. Replace as soon Honda new vehicle warranty. as it is convenient. Check the fluid level with the If you are not sure how to check and transmission at normal operating add fluid, contact your dealer. 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back temperature and the vehicle on level into the transmission securely as ground. shown in the illustration. Remove the transmission filler bolt, If you are not sure how to add fluid, and carefully feel inside the bolt hole contact your dealer. with your finger. The fluid level should be up to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is not, add Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it starts to run out of the hole.

260 2009 Fit Brake and Clutch Fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not Brake Fluid reservoirs monthly. compatible with your vehicle's There are up to two reservoirs, braking system and can cause depending on the model. They are: extensive damage.

● Brake fluid reservoir (all models)

● Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission models only) Replace the brake fluid according to the time recommendation in the maintenance minder schedule. MAX MIN Maintenance Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not The fluid level should be between available, you should use only DOT 3 the MIN and MAX marks on the side or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed of the reservoir. If the level is at or container, as a temporary below the MIN mark, your brake replacement. system needs attention. Have the brake system inspected for leaks or Using any non-Honda brake fluid can worn brake pads/shoes. cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible. CONTINUED

2009 Fit 261 Brake and Clutch Fluid, Lights

Clutch Fluid Headlight Aiming ELECTRICAL BULB HOLD-DOWN Manual Transmission only The headlights were properly aimed CONNECTOR WIRE when your vehicle was new. If you MAX regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, readjustment may be required. Adjustments should be done by your dealer or another qualified mechanic. Replacing a Headlight Bulb Your vehicle has halogen headlight bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle RUBBER WEATHER SEAL it by its base, and protect the glass 1. Open the hood. MIN from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean 2. Remove the electrical connector The fluid level should be between it with denatured alcohol and a clean from the bulb by pulling the the MIN and MAX marks on the side cloth. connector straight back. of the reservoir. If it is not, add brake 3. Remove the rubber weather seal fluid to bring it up to that level. Use by pulling on the tab. the same fluid specified for the brake system. Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot A low fluid level can indicate a leak in when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch the clutch system. Have this system on the glass can cause the bulb to inspected as soon as possible. overheat and shatter.

262 2009 Fit Lights

4. Unclip the end of the hold-down HOLD-DOWN Replacing a Parking Light/Front wire from its slot. Pivot the wire WIRE Side Marker Bulb out of the way, then remove the bulb. 5. Install the new bulb into the hole, making sure the tabs are in their slots. Pivot the hold-down wire back in place, and clip the end into the slot.

INSPECTION WINDOW

6. Make sure that the hold-down wire Maintenance is installed properly and securely. You can check its installation from 1. Open the hood. the inspection window on the headlight assembly. 2. Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise. 7. Install the rubber seal over the back of the headlight assembly. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight 8. Push the electrical connector onto into the socket until it bottoms. the new bulb. Make sure it is connected securely. Turn on the 4. Reinstall the socket into the light headlights to test the new bulb. assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 263 Lights

5. Turn on the lights to make sure Replacing a Front Turn Signal 5. Reinstall the socket into the light the new bulb is working. Light Bulb assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks. 6. Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise. 3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing the bulb in and turning it counterclockwise until it unlocks. 4. Install the new bulb in the socket. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

264 2009 Fit Lights

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb 5. Insert the new bulb into the hole, On Sport model and turn it one-quarter turn The fog lights use halogen bulbs. clockwise to lock it in place. When replacing a bulb, handle it 6. Push the electrical connector back carefully. See page 262 for more onto the bulb. Make sure it is on information. all the way. 7. Turn on the fog lights to test the new bulb. 8. Reinstall the fog light assembly, ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR then tighten the screw.

3. Remove the electrical connector Maintenance from the bulb by squeezing the connector to unlock the tab, then slide the connector off the bulb.

SCREW 4. Remove the bulb by turning it about one-quarter turn 1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to counterclockwise. remove the screw. 2. To remove the fog light assembly, pull it out of the bumper.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 265 Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs 4. Remove the burned out bulb from the socket by pulling it straight out of its socket. 5. Install the new bulb in the socket. 6. Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working. 7. Reinstall the socket into the light assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks. 8. Reinstall the light assembly cover. LIGHT ASSEMBLY COVER 2. Determine which of the three bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight, 1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on back-up light, or turn signal light. the edge of the light assembly cover. Remove the cover by 3. Remove the socket by turning it carefully prying in the notch on its one-quarter turn counterclockwise. middle edge with a flat-tip screwdriver.

266 2009 Fit Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Cleaning the Seat Belts Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat Floor Mats belt anchors can cause the belts to (Optional) LOOP retract slowly. Wipe the insides of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in mild soap and warm Unlock water or isopropyl alcohol. Lock

KNOB Maintenance If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap The driver's floor mat that came with and warm water to clean them. Do your vehicle hooks over the floor mat not use bleach, dye, or cleaning anchors. To lock each hook, turn the solvents. Let the belts air-dry before knob clockwise. This keeps the floor you use the vehicle. mat from sliding forward and possibly interfering with the pedals. When cleaning or replacing, turn the knob counterclockwise to unhook the floor mat.

CONTINUED 2009 Fit 267 Floor Mats, Audio Antenna, Dust and Pollen Filter

If you remove the driver's floor mat, Audio Antenna Dust and Pollen Filter make sure to re-anchor it when you On models with A/C put it back in your vehicle. This filter removes the dust and pollen that is brought in from the If you use a non-Honda floor mats, outside through the heating and make sure they fit properly and that cooling system. they can be anchored securely. Do not put additional floor mats on top of Have your dealer replace the filter the anchored mat. when this service is indicated by a maintenance message on the information display. It should be replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air, or if the flow from the heating and cooling system becomes less than usual. Your vehicle is equipped with an antenna at the rear of the roof. Before using a ‘‘ drive-through ’’ car wash, remove the antenna by unscrewing it by hand. This prevents the antenna from being damaged by the car wash brushes.

268 2009 Fit Wiper Blades

Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS blades at least every six months. Replace them if you find signs of cracking in the rubber, areas that are getting hard, or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used.

LOCK TAB

To replace a front wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly Maintenance from the wiper arm: 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield. Raise the driver's side ● Put a cloth on the edge of the first, then the passenger's side. lock tab, then push up on the lock tab carefully with a flat-tip screwdriver.

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised, or you will damage the hood and wiper arms.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 269 Wiper Blades

WIPER ARM BLADE 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge, remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade, and install them in the slots along the edge of the new blade. REINFORCEMENT BLADE TOP

● Pivot the blade assembly toward 3. Remove the blade from its holder the wiper arm until it releases by grabbing the tabbed end of the from the wiper arm. blade. Pull firmly until the tabs come out of the holder. When replacing a wiper blade, make sure not to drop the wiper blade or wiper arm down on the windshield.

Make sure the two rubber tabs inside the blade fit to each notch of the reinforcement, as shown.

270 2009 Fit Wiper Blades

6. Slide the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. Push down the lock tab. Make sure the wiper blade assembly locks in place. 7. Lower the wiper arm down against the windshield, the passenger's side first, then the driver's side.

5. Place the top of the wiper blade on To replace the rear wiper blade: Maintenance the end of the blade assembly, and 1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear slide the blade onto the assembly. window. Make sure the blade is completely 2. Disconnect the blade assembly installed. from the wiper arm by pivoting the blade assembly upward.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 271 Wiper Blades

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT 3. Slide the blade out of the holder. 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If 5. Slide the new blade into the they have no plastic or metal holder. Make sure it is engaged in reinforcement along the back the slot along its full length. edge, remove the metal Insert both ends of the blade into reinforcement strips from the old the holder. Make sure they are wiper blade, and install them in the secure. slots along the edge of the new blade. 6. Install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. Make sure it locks in place. 7. Lower the wiper arm against the windshield.

272 2009 Fit Tires

To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Even though your vehicle is tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated equipped with TPMS, we size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of recommend that you visually check tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding your tires every day. If you think a comfort. tire might be low, check it The following pages give more immediately with a tire gauge. detailed information on how to take ● Underinflated tires wear unevenly, care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel Use a gauge to measure the air when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to pressure in each tire at least once a fail from being overheated. month. Even tires that are in good condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to ● Overinflated tires can make your 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per vehicle ride more harshly, are Using tires that are excessively month. Remember to check the

more prone to damage from road Maintenance spare tire (if equipped) at the same worn or improperly inflated can hazards, and wear unevenly. cause a crash in which you can time. be seriously hurt or killed. The tire pressure monitoring system ꭧ Check the air pressures when the (TPMS) warns you when a tire tires are cold. This means the vehicle pressure is low. See page 235 for Follow all instructions in this has been parked for at least 3 hours, more information. owner's manual regarding tire or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). inflation and maintenance. ꭧ: If equipped Add or release air, if needed, to match the recommended cold tire pressures.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 273 Tires

If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures If equipped tires are hot [driven for several miles The following charts show the The compact spare tire pressure is: (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 recommended cold tire pressures for 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 most normal and high-speed driving For convenience, the recommended kgf/cm2) higher than the cold conditions. tire sizes and cold tire pressures are readings. This is normal. Do not let All models except Sport on a label on the driver's doorjamb. air out to match the recommended cold air pressure. The tire will be Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure For additional information about your underinflated. for Normal Driving tires, see page 323. 175/65R15 84S Front/Rear: You should get your own tire 32 psi (220 kPa, pressure gauge and use it whenever 2.2 kgf/cm2) you check your tire pressures. This Sport model will make it easier for you to tell if a pressure loss is due to a tire problem Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure and not due to a variation between for Normal Driving gauges. 185/55R16 83H Front/Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, While tubeless tires have some 2.3 kgf/cm2) ability to self-seal if they are punctured, you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure.

274 2009 Fit Tires

Tire Inspection INDICATOR LOCATION MARK Tire Service Life Every time you check inflation, you The service life of your tires is should also examine the tires for dependent on many factors, damage, foreign objects, and wear. including, but not limited to, driving habits, road conditions, vehicle You should look for: loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and ● Bumps or bulges in the tread or environmental conditions (even side of the tire. Replace the tire if when the tires are not in use). you find either of these conditions.

● Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of In addition to your regular the tire. Replace the tire if you can TREAD WEAR INDICATOR inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators Maintenance molded into the tread. When the you have annual inspections ● Excessive tread wear. tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 performed once the tires reach five inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the years old. It is also recommended tread. This shows there is less than that all tires, including the spare, be 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on removed from service after 10 years the tire. from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state A tire this worn gives very little of wear. traction on wet roads. You should The last four digits of the TIN (tire replace the tire if you can see three identification number) are found on or more tread wear indicators. the sidewall of the tire and indicate the date of manufacture (See Tire Labeling on page 323). CONTINUED

2009 Fit 275 Tires

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels In addition to proper inflation, correct Replace your tires with radial tires of wheel alignment helps to decrease Front Front the same size, load range, speed tire wear. If you find a tire is worn rating, and maximum cold tire unevenly, have your dealer check the pressure rating (as shown on the wheel alignment. tire's sidewall). Have your dealer check the tires if Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on you feel a consistent vibration while your vehicle can reduce braking driving. A tire should always be ability, traction, and steering rebalanced if it is removed from the accuracy. Using tires of a different wheel. When you have new tires size or construction can cause the (For Non-directional (For Directional installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) ABS and vehicle stability assist balanced. This increases riding system (VSA)ꭧ to work comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and inconsistently. have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate The ABS and VSA systemꭧ work by balance. the tires according to the comparing the speed of the wheels. maintenance messages displayed on When replacing tires, use the same the information display. Move the size originally supplied with the tires to the positions shown in the vehicle. Tire size and construction On vehicles with aluminum wheels, illustration each time they are can affect wheel speed and may improper wheel weights can damage rotated. If you purchase directional cause the system to activate. your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use tires, rotate only front-to-back. ꭧ: If equipped only Honda wheel weights for When the tires are rotated, make balancing. sure the air pressures are checked.

276 2009 Fit Tires

It is best to replace all four tires at Wheel and Tire Specifications the same time. If that is not possible Wheels: or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tires on your All models except Sport tires or two rear tires as a pair. vehicle can affect handling and 15 x 5 1/2J Replacing just one tire can seriously stability. This can cause a crash Sport model affect your vehicle's handling. in which you can be seriously 16 x 6J hurt or killed. If you ever replace a wheel, make Tires: sure that the wheel's specifications Always use the size and type of All models except Sport match those of the original wheels. tires recommended in this 175/65R15 84S Also be sure you use only TPMS owner's manual. Sport model specific wheels (if equipped). If you 185/55R16 83H

do not, the tire pressure monitoring See page 321 for DOT tire quality Maintenance system will not work. grading information, and page 323 for tire size and labeling information. Replacement wheels are available at your dealer.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 277 Tires

Winter Driving Tire Chains Tires marked ‘‘ M ＋ S ’’ or ‘‘ All Mount tire chains on your tires when Season ’’ on the sidewall have an all- required by driving conditions or local Traction devices that are the wrong size weather tread design suitable for laws. Install them only on the front or improperly installed can damage most winter driving conditions. tires. your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they For the best performance in snowy Because your vehicle has limited tire are hitting any part of the vehicle. or icy conditions, you should install clearance, Honda strongly snow tires or tire chains. They may recommends using the chains listed be required by local laws under below, made by Security Chain certain conditions. Company (SCC). Snow Tires All models except Sport Using the wrong chains, or not If you mount snow tires on your SC1026 properly installing chains, can vehicle, make sure they are radial damage the brake lines and tires of the same size and load range Sport model cause a crash in which you can as the original tires. Mount snow SC1030 be seriously injured or killed. tires on all four wheels. The traction When installing cables, follow the provided by snow tires on dry roads manufacturer's instructions, and Follow all instructions in this may be lower than your original tires. mount them as tight as you can. Make owner's manual regarding the Check with the tire dealer for sure they are not contacting the brake selection and use of tire chains. maximum speed recommendations. lines or suspension. Drive slowly with them installed. If you hear them coming into contact with the body or chassis, stop and investigate. Remove them as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

278 2009 Fit Tires, Checking the Battery

Wheels Checking the Battery Check the terminals for corrosion (a Clean the wheels as you would the white or yellowish powder). To rest of the exterior. Wash them with TEST INDICATOR WINDOW remove it, cover the terminals with a the same solution, and rinse them solution of baking soda and water. It thoroughly. will bubble up and turn brown. When this stops, wash it off with plain If equipped water. Dry off the battery with a cloth Aluminum alloy wheels have a or paper towel. Coat the terminals protective clear-coat that keeps the with grease to help prevent future aluminum from corroding and corrosion. tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with harsh chemicals (including some If additional battery maintenance is commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff needed, see your dealer or a brush can damage the clear-coat. To qualified technician. Maintenance clean the wheels, use a mild Check the condition of the battery detergent and a soft brush or sponge. monthly by looking at the test indicator window. The label on the battery explains the test indicator's colors. The location of the test indicator window varies between manufacturers.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 279 Checking the Battery

WARNING: Battery posts, On vehicles with navigation system terminals, and related accessories The navigation system will also contain lead and lead compounds. The battery gives off explosive disable itself. The next time you turn Wash your hands after handling. hydrogen gas during normal on the ignition switch, the system operation. will require you to enter ‘‘ ENTER If you need to connect the battery to CODE ’’ before it can be used. Refer a charger, disconnect both cables to A spark or flame can cause the to the navigation system manual. prevent damaging your vehicle's battery to explode with enough electrical system. Always disconnect force to kill or seriously hurt the negative (－) cable first, and you. reconnect it last. On vehicles without navigation system Wear protective clothing and a If your vehicle's battery is face shield, or have a skilled disconnected, or goes dead, the time technician do the battery setting is lost. To reset the time, see maintenance. page 192. If your vehicle's battery is disconnected, or goes dead, the audio system may disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio, you will see ‘‘ ENTER CODE ’’ in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the code (see page 191).

280 2009 Fit Vehicle Storage

If you need to park your vehicle for ● If the vehicle is to be stored for a ● Cover the vehicle with a an extended period (more than 1 longer period, it should be ‘‘ breathable ’’ cover, one made month), there are several things you supported on jackstands so the from a porous material such as should do to prepare it for storage. tires are off the ground. cotton. Non-porous materials, such Proper preparation helps prevent as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, ● Leave one window open slightly (if deterioration and makes it easier to which can damage the paint. the vehicle is being stored get your vehicle back on the road. If indoors). ● If possible, periodically run the possible, store your vehicle indoors. engine until it reaches full ● Disconnect the battery. ● Fill the fuel tank. operating temperature (the cooling ● Support the front and rear wiper fans cycle on and off twice). ● Wash and dry the exterior blade arms with a folded towel or Preferably, do this once a month. completely. rag so they do not touch the ● Clean the interior. Make sure the windshield. Maintenance carpeting, floor mats, etc., are ● To minimize sticking, apply a completely dry. silicone spray lubricant to all door ● Leave the parking brake off. Put and tailgate seals. Also, apply a the transmission in reverse vehicle body wax to the painted (manual) or Park (automatic). surfaces that mate with the door and tailgate seals. ● Block the rear wheels.

2009 Fit 281 282 2009 Fit Taking Care of the Unexpected

This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire ...... 284 common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ...... 285 experience with their vehicles. It Temporarily Repairing a Flat gives you information about how to Tire...... 291 safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Won't Start...... 297 to do to correct it. If the problem has Jump Starting...... 299 stranded you on the side of the road, If the Engine Overheats ...... 301 you may be able to get going again. If Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 303 not, you will also find instructions on Charging System Indicator ...... 303 getting your vehicle towed. Malfunction Indicator Lamp...... 304 Brake System Indicator...... 305 Fuses ...... 306 Fuse Locations...... 309

Emergency Towing...... 311 Unexpected the of Care Taking If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ...... 312

2009 Fit 283 TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR INDICATOR LOCATION MARK Replace the tire when youthe can tread see wear indicator bars.replacement The should be the sameand size design tire, mounted onsame the wheel. The spare tiredesigned is to not be mounted onwheel, a and regular the spare wheeldesigned is for not mounting a regular tire. 2009 Fit Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). This tire gives a harsherless ride traction and on some road surfaces. Use greater caution while driving. Do not mount tire chainscompact on spare the tire. Do not use your compacton spare another tire vehicle unless itsame is make the and model. On vehicles with the TPMS system, the low tire pressure indicator comes on and staysafter on you replace the flatthe tire compact with spare tire. After several miles (kilometers) driving with the compact spare tire,TPMS the indicator comes on andlow the tire pressure indicator goes off. ● ● ● ● ● Follow these precautions: ) 2 Compact Spare Tire 284 Except all Canadian models with automatic transmission Use the compact spare tiretemporary as replacement a only. Get your regular tire repaired or replaced, and put it backvehicle on as your soon as you can. Check the inflation pressure ofcompact the spare tire every timecheck you the other tires. Itinflated should to: be 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm Taking Care of the Unexpected 285 LOOP STRAP CONTINUED JACK Changing a Flat Tire FLOOR LID area floor lid by liftingthe it back up of with the strap.floor To lid keep open, the hook theside looped of the strap torear the center legs head of restraint. the tire. SPARE TIRE TOOL KIT 4. Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo 5. Take the tool kit out of the spare 2009 Fit The vehicle can easily rollthe off jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath. Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported onlyjack. by the non-slippery ground. Put the transmission in Park (automatic) or reverse (manual). Apply the parking brake. and turn the ignition switchLOCK to (0) the position. Have all passengers get out of thewhile vehicle you change the tire. 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, 3. Lift the rear center head restraint.

Except all Canadian models with automatic transmission If you have a flatstop tire in while a driving, safe placeDrive to slowly change along it. the shoulderyou until get to an exitthat or is an far area away to from stop the traffic lanes. Changing a Flat Tire

EXTENSION WHEEL NUT

WHEEL COVER WHEEL NUT WRENCH 6. Take the jack out of the cargo area. 8. On all models except Sport and 9. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn Canadian LX model with manual with the wheel nut wrench. Turn the jack's end bracket transmission, remove the wheel counterclockwise to loosen it, then cover by carefully prying under its remove the jack by lifting it edge with the flat tip of the straight up. extension. 7. Unscrew the wing bolt and take the spare tire out of its well.

286 2009 Fit Changing a Flat Tire

BRAKE HUB EXTENSION

JACKING POINT WHEEL NUT WRENCH 10. Place the jack under the jacking 11. Use the extension and the wheel 13. Before mounting the spare tire, point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting

change. It is pointed to by a △ vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with Unexpected the of Care Taking mark molded into the underside of ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub the body (Sport model). Turn the carefully; it may be hot from 12. Remove the wheel nuts, then end bracket clockwise until the top driving. remove the flat tire. Handle the of the jack contacts the jacking wheel nuts carefully; they may be point. Make sure the jacking point hot from driving. Place the flat tire tab is resting in the jack notch. on the ground with the outside surface facing up.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 287 Changing a Flat Tire

14. Put on the spare tire. Put the wheel nuts back on finger-tight, then tighten them in a crisscross pattern with the wheel nut wrench until the wheel is firmly against the hub. Do not try to tighten the wheel nuts fully. 15. Lower the vehicle to the ground, TAB and remove the jack.

FLOOR LID 16. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 18. Remove the strap loop from the the same crisscross pattern. Have legs of the head restraint and the wheel nut torque checked at lower the cargo area floor lid. the nearest automotive service 19. Pull the floor lid toward you and facility. remove the tabs. Tighten the wheel nuts to: 80 lbf·ft (108 N·m, 11 kgf·m) 20. Pull the floor lid out. 17. On Sport model and Canadian LX model with manual transmission: Remove the center cap before storing the flat tire.

288 2009 Fit Changing a Flat Tire

23. Store the jack. Place the tool kit in 24. Place the floor lid in the cargo the center of the flat tire. area. 25. Store the wheel cover or center cap in the cargo area. Make sure will not get scratched or damaged. Loose items can fly around the For For 26. Close the tailgate. nomal spare interior in a crash and could tire tire seriously injure the occupants. 27. On U.S. models Your vehicle's original tire has a Store the wheel, jack, and tools tire pressure monitoring system securely before driving. sensor. To replace a tire, refre to Changing a Tire with TPMS (see 21. Place the flat tire face down in the page 237). spare tire well. 22. Secure the flat tire by screwing the Unexpected the of Care Taking wing bolt back into its hole.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 289 WIRE SUPPORT RING on the outer side ofas the shown. tire valve 3. Make sure the wire support ring is 2009 Fit cover to the tire valvewheel, on then the install the wheel cover. 2. Align the valve mark on the wheel CLIPS CLIPS hooked into the clips aroundedge the of the wheel cover. 1. Make sure the wire support ring is Changing a Flat Tire Installing a wheel cover All models except Sport andLX Canadian model with manual transmission 290 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

How to Use the Tire Repair Kit If you have a flat tire while driving, TIRE VALVE All Canadian models with automatic park the vehicle on a level surface in transmission a safe place, put the transmission in To reduce weight, your vehicle is Park (P), set the parking brake, and equipped with a tire repair kit instead turn the hazard lights on. of a spare tire. This kit will allow you Thoroughly examine the tire for a to temporarily repair a flat tire under puncture or other damage. the following conditions: If a puncture is wider than 3/16ths of ● Only one tire is flat. an inch (4 mm), or is located in the tire sidewall, do not attempt to repair ● The puncture is smaller than 3/ 16ths of an inch (4 mm). the tire. Have your vehicle towed to a VALVE CAP Honda service center. In Canada or ● The puncture is located within the the continental U.S.A. simply call 1- 1. Park vehicle on a level surface in a tread. 800-465-PLUS (7587) for Honda Plus safe place. Set shifter lever into Roadside Assistance. PARK and engage the parking Unexpected the of Care Taking ● The wheel rim is not damaged. brake. Turn hazard light on. If the damage is smaller than 3/16ths ● The tire bead is seated. Remove valve cap from tire valve. of an inch (4 mm) and within the tire When making a temporary repair, tread, proceed with the following carefully follow all instructions in this instructions. owner's manual and in the instructions that came with the kit.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 291 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

FLOOR LID LOOP ● An empty recovery bottle. A tire repair professional will use this to collect the injected sealant from the tire during the permanent repair.

TIRE REPAIR KIT STRAP 2. Lift the rear center head restraint. Your tire repair kit contains: 3. Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo ● An air pump with a power cord and area floor lid by lifting it up with the an air hose attached. back of the strap. To keep the floor EXPIRATION DATE ● A bottle of sealant with a filler hose lid open, hook the looped side of attached. 4. Remove the sealant bottle and the strap to the legs of the rear check the expiration date on the center head restraint. ● Two labels, one for the tire wheel label. If the date has expired, do not and one for the instrument panel. continue. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest Honda service ● An instruction sheet. center. In Canada or the continental U.S.A. simply call 1-800- 465-PLUS (7587) for Honda Plus Roadside Assistance.

292 2009 Fit Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

If the date has not expired, shake AIR PUMP BOTTLE CAP ADAPTER PLUG the bottle thoroughly and proceed to step 5. TIRE VALVE BOTTLE CAP

AIR PUMP HOSE ACCESSORY SOCKET 6. Unscrew the bottle cap from the 8. Route the power cord into the bottle adapter. vehicle, and insert the plug into the BOTTLE HOSE 7. Remove the air pump from the accessory power socket. Unexpected the of Care Taking 5. Screw the sealant filler hose onto repair kit, then screw the air pump Pay attention not to have the power the tire valve. Make sure the bottle hose onto the bottle adapter tightly. cord pinched by the door. remains upright to ensure all of the sealant flows into the tire. 9. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 293 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

In freezing temperatures, turn the AIR PUMP SWITCH 11. Inflate the tire to 33 psi (230 kPa), engine on and leave it running then turn the air pump switch OFF while the flat tire is being serviced. for an accurate pressure reading. If Prolonged exposure to the cold OFF the pressure fails to reach 33 psi may cause the vehicle's battery to (230 kPa) within 15 minutes, do weaken. Under cold conditions, ON not continue, and have the vehicle safely start the vehicle's engine and towed. In Canada or the keep the engine running at idle continental U.S.A. simply call 1- when operating the air pump. 800-465-PLUS (7587) for Honda Plus Roadside Assistance. 12. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Running the engine with the 10. Turn the air pump on to inflate the vehicle in an enclosed or even tire. Do not run the air pump for 13. Remove the sealant bottle hose partly enclosed area can cause more than 15 minutes or it may from the tire valve, then reinstall a rapid build-up of toxic carbon overheat. The air pressure gauge the tire valve cap. monoxide. will show about 40 to 60 psi (275 to Breathing this colorless, 415 kPa) for the first few minutes odorless gas can cause while the sealant is pumped into unconsciousness and even the tire, and then the pressure will death. Only run the engine to go down to about 10 to 20 psi (70 power the air pump with the to 140 kPa). vehicle outdoors.

294 2009 Fit Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

AIR PRESSURE GAUGE LABEL

WHEEL LABEL

DEFLATE BUTTON 14. Push the deflate button on the air 15. Remove the wheel label from the 16. Remove the front pillar label from pump until the air pressure gauge repair kit, wipe any dirt off the the repair kit and place it as shown

shows 0 psi. wheel with a clean cloth, and above. Unexpected the of Care Taking attach the label to the center of the wheel. 17. Remove the power plug from the accessory power socket. The label may adhere poorly when cold. Clean the surface and 18. Return all items except the air securely attach the label. pump to the repair kit, and store the kit in the cargo floor box. Keep the air pump handy as you may need it soon.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 295 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

19. Drive carefully within the speed of If pressure is less than 19 psi (130 50 mph (80 km/h) for 5 minutes. kPa), do not drive the vehicle further or attempt to re-inflate the tire. Call or wait for help. If pressure is lower than 33 psi (230 VALVE CAP TIRE VALVE kPa) and higher than 19 psi (130 kPa), use air pump to bring tire pressure to 33 psi (230 kPa). 21. Then, drive carefully within the speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for 5 AIR PUMP HOSE minutes more. 20. Stop safely and check the pressure 22. Stop safely and check the pressure in the tire. Remove the tire valve in the tire. cap, screw the air pump hose onto the tire valve, and check the air gauge. (You do not need to attach the power cord or turn the air pump switch on.)

296 2009 Fit Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won't Start

If the pressure is lower than 32 psi If the Engine Won't Start Nothing Happens or the Starter (220 kPa) and higher than 19 psi Diagnosing why the engine won't Motor Operates Very Slowly (130 kPa), use the air pump to start falls into two areas, depending When you turn the ignition switch to bring air to the desired level as on what you hear when you turn the the START (III) position, you do not described in step 11. Then drive to ignition switch to the START (III) hear the normal noise of the engine the nearest service station at no position: trying to start. You may hear a more than 50 mph (80 km/h). clicking sound, a series of clicks, or ● You hear nothing, or almost nothing at all. If the pressure is below 19 psi, do nothing. The engine's starter Check these things: not continue. Have the vehicle motor does not operate at all, or towed (see page 311). operates very slowly. ● Check the transmission interlock. If you have a manual transmission, In any case, be sure to have the ● You can hear the starter motor the clutch pedal must be pushed damaged tire permanently repaired operating normally, or the starter all the way to the floor or the as soon as possible. motor sounds like it is spinning starter will not operate. With an faster than normal, but the engine Unexpected the of Care Taking Remember to return the tire sealant automatic transmission, it must be does not start up and run. bottle to your Honda service center in Park or neutral. for proper disposal. ● Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. Turn on the headlights, and check their brightness. If the headlights are very dim or do not come on at all, the battery is discharged. See Jump Starting on page 299.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 297 If the Engine Won't Start

● Turn the ignition switch to the The Starter Operates Normally ● Do you have fuel? Check the fuel START (III) position. If the In this case, the starter motor's speed gauge; the low fuel indicator may headlights do not dim, check the sounds normal, or even faster than not be working. condition of the fuses. If the fuses normal, when you turn the ignition ● There may be an electrical are OK, there is probably switch to the START (III) position, problem, such as no power to the something wrong with the but the engine does not run. fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see electrical circuit for the ignition ● Are you using a properly coded page 306). switch or starter motor. You will key? An improperly coded key will need a qualified technician to If you find nothing wrong, you will cause the immobilizer system determine the problem. See need a qualified technician to find the indicator in the instrument panel on page 311. problem. See on Emergency Towing to blink rapidly (see page 79). Emergency Towing page 311. If the headlights dim noticeably or go ● Are you using the proper starting out when you try to start the engine, procedure? Refer to Starting the either the battery is discharged or Engine on page 216. the connections are corroded. Check the condition of the battery and terminal connections (see page 279). You can then try jump starting the vehicle from a booster battery (see page 299).

298 2009 Fit Jump Starting

Although this seems like a simple To Jump Start Your Vehicle: procedure, you should take several 1. Open the hood, and check the precautions. physical condition of the battery. In very cold weather, check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or frozen, do not try A battery can explode if you do jump starting until it thaws. not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby. If a battery sits in extreme cold, the BOOSTER BATTERY Keep all sparks, open flames, electrolyte inside can freeze. Attempting and smoking materials away The numbers in the illustration show to jump start with a frozen battery can you the order to connect the jumper from the battery. cause it to rupture. cables. Unexpected the of Care Taking

You cannot start your vehicle with an 2. Turn off all the electrical automatic transmission by pushing accessories: heater, A/C (if or pulling it. equipped), audio system, lights, etc. Put the transmission in neutral (manual) or Park (automatic), and set the parking brake.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 299 Jump Starting

5. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, have an assistant start that vehicle and run it at a fast idle. 6. Start your vehicle. If the starter motor still operates slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact. 7. Once your vehicle is running, disconnect the negative cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery. Disconnect the 3. Remove the cover from the under- 4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from your vehicle, hood fuse box (see page 306). to the negative (－) terminal on then from the booster battery. Connect one jumper cable to the the booster battery. Connect the ＋ Keep the ends of the jumper cables positive ( ) terminal on your other end to the ground strap as away from each other and any metal battery. Connect the other end to shown. Do not connect this jumper ＋ on the vehicle until everything is the positive ( ) terminal on the cable to any other part of the disconnected. Otherwise, you may booster battery. engine. cause an electrical short.

300 2009 Fit If the Engine Overheats

The high temperature indicator 3. If you do not see steam or spray, should be off under most conditions. leave the engine running, and If the engine coolant temperature Steam and spray from an check the high temperature gets higher than normal, the overheated engine can indicator. If the high heat is due to indicator will blink. If it stays on, you seriously scald you. overloading, the engine should should determine the reason (hot start to cool down almost day, driving up a steep hill, etc.). Do not open the hood if steam immediately. If it does, wait until is coming out. the high temperature indicator If the vehicle overheats, you should goes off, then continue driving. take immediate action. The only indication may be the high 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the high temperature indicator temperature indicator blinking or Put the transmission in neutral stays on, turn off the engine. remaining on. Or you may see steam (manual) or Park (automatic), and or spray coming from under the set the parking brake. Turn off all hood. accessories, and turn on the hazard warning lights. Unexpected the of Care Taking 2. If you see steam and/or spray coming from under the hood, turn Driving with the high temperature off the engine. Wait until you see indicator on can cause serious damage no more signs of steam or spray, to your engine. then open the hood.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 301 If the Engine Overheats

5. Look for any obvious coolant 9. Start the engine, and set the leaks, such as a split radiator hose. temperature control dial to Everything is still extremely hot, Removing the radiator cap maximum heat. Add coolant to the so use caution. If you find a leak, it while the engine is hot can radiator up to the base of the filler must be repaired before you cause the coolant to spray out, neck. If you do not have the proper continue driving (see Emergency seriously scalding you. coolant mixture available, you can Towing on page 311). add plain water. Remember to Always let the engine and have the cooling system drained 6. If you don't find an obvious leak, radiator cool down before and refilled with the proper check the coolant level in the removing the radiator cap. mixture as soon as you can. radiator reserve tank. Add coolant if the level is below the MIN mark. 10. Put the radiator cap back on 8. Using gloves or a large heavy tightly. Run the engine, and check 7. If there was no coolant in the cloth, turn the radiator cap the high temperature indicator. If reserve tank, you may need to add counterclockwise, without pushing it begins to blink or comes on coolant to the radiator. Let the down, to the first stop. After the again, the engine needs repair (see engine cool down until the high pressure releases, push down on Emergency Towing on page 311). temperature indicator goes off the cap, and turn it until it comes before checking the radiator. off. 11. If the temperature stays normal, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. If it has gone down, add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on tightly.

302 2009 Fit Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system come on when the engine is warning lights. indicator comes on brightly running. If it starts flashing or stays 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. when the engine is running, the on, the oil pressure has dropped very Open the hood, and check the oil battery is not being charged. low or lost pressure. Serious engine level (see page 201). An engine Immediately turn off all electrical damage is possible, and you should very low on oil can lose pressure accessories. Try not to use other take immediate action. during cornering and other driving electrically operated controls such as maneuvers. the power windows. Keep the engine 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the running; starting the engine will discharge the battery rapidly. Running the engine with low oil level back to the full mark on the pressure can cause serious mechanical dipstick (see page 253). Go to a service station or garage damage almost immediately. Turn off 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil where you can get technical the engine as soon as you can safely get pressure indicator. If it does not go assistance. Unexpected the of Care Taking the vehicle stopped. out within 10 seconds, turn off the engine. There is a mechanical problem that needs to be repaired before you can continue driving (see Emergency Towing on page 311).

2009 Fit 303 Malfunction Indicator Lamp

If this indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, Readiness Codes while driving, it means one even though it may go off as you Your vehicle has certain ‘‘ readiness of the engine's emissions control continue driving, have your vehicle codes ’’ that are part of the on-board systems may have a problem. Even checked by a dealer as soon as diagnostics for the emissions though you may feel no difference in possible. systems. In some states, part of the your vehicle's performance, it can emissions testing is to make sure reduce your fuel economy and cause these codes are set. If they are not increased emissions. Continued set, the test cannot be completed. operation may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the malfunction If the battery in your vehicle has If you have recently refueled your indicator lamp on, you can damage been disconnected or gone dead, vehicle, the indicator coming on your vehicle's emissions controls and these codes are erased. It can take could be due to a loose or missing engine. Those repairs may not be several days of driving under various fuel fill cap. You will also see a covered by your vehicle's warranties. conditions to set the codes again. ‘‘ ’’ CHECK FUEL CAP message on To check if they are set, turn the the information display. Tighten the If your vehicle has an automatic ignition switch to the ON (II) cap until it clicks at least once. transmission, the malfunction position, without starting the engine. Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator lamp may also come on The malfunction indicator lamp will indicator off immediately; it can take with the ‘‘ D ’’ indicator. come on for 20 seconds. If it then several days of normal driving. goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. If possible, do not take your vehicle for an emissions test until the readiness codes are set. Refer to Emissions Testing for more information (see page 329).

304 2009 Fit Brake System Indicator

U.S. Canada However, if the brake pedal does not If the ABS indicator and the VSA Brake System feel normal, you should take system indicator (if equipped) come Indicator (Red) immediate action. A problem in one on with the brake system indicator, part of the system's dual circuit have your vehicle inspected by your The brake system indicator (red) design will still give you braking at dealer immediately. normally comes on when you turn two wheels. You will feel the brake the ignition switch to the ON (II) pedal go down much farther before position, and as a reminder to check the vehicle begins to slow down, and the parking brake. It will stay on if you will have to press harder on the you do not fully release the parking pedal. brake. Slow down by shifting to a lower If the brake system indicator (red) gear, and pull to the side of the road comes on while driving, the brake when it is safe. Because of the long fluid level is probably low. Press distance needed to stop, it is lightly on the brake pedal to see if it hazardous to drive the vehicle. You Unexpected the of Care Taking feels normal. If it does, check the should have it towed and repaired as brake fluid level the next time you soon as possible (see Emergency stop at a service station (see page Towing on page 311). 261). If you must drive the vehicle a short If the fluid level is low, take your distance in this condition, drive vehicle to a dealer, and have the slowly and carefully. brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads/shoes.

2009 Fit 305 Fuses

INTERIOR INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD (On Battery)

FUSE LID FUSE LABEL The vehicle's fuses are contained in The under-hood fuse box is on the two fuse boxes. positive terminal of the battery. The interior fuse box is behind the fuse lid. To access it, pull the fuse lid toward you.

306 2009 Fit Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE If something electrical in your vehicle stops working, check for a blown fuse first. Determine from the chart on pages 309 and 310, or the diagram on the fuse label, which fuse or fuses control that device. Check those fuses first, but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is the cause. Replace any blown fuses, and check if the device works. BLOWN FUSE PULLER 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Make sure the 3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check all smaller fuses in the headlights and all other the under-hood fuse box and the interior fuse box by pulling out accessories are off. interior fuse box by looking each one with the fuse puller Unexpected the of Care Taking through the top at the wire inside. provided in the interior fuse box. 2. On the under-hood fuse box, remove the cover from the fuse box. On the interior fuse box, pull the fuse lid toward you.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 307 Fuses

BLOWN If you replace the blown fuse with a On vehicles without navigation system spare fuse that has a lower rating, it If the radio fuse is removed, the might blow out again. This does not audio system will disable itself. The indicate anything wrong. Replace the next time you turn on the radio you fuse with one of the correct rating as will see ‘‘ ENTER CODE ’’ in the soon as you can. frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the code (see page 191). When the audio system is disabled, Replacing a fuse with one that has a the clock setting in the audio system higher rating greatly increases the will be canceled. You will need to chances of damaging the electrical reset the clock (see page 192). 5. Look for a blown wire inside the system. If you do not have a fuse. If it is blown, replace it with replacement fuse with the proper rating On vehicles with navigation system one of the spare fuses of the same for the circuit, install one with a lower The navigation system will also rating or lower. rating. disable itself. The next time you turn on the ignition switch, the system If you cannot drive the vehicle will require you to enter ‘‘ ENTER without fixing the problem, and you 6. If the replacement fuse of the same CODE ’’ before it can be used. Refer do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse rating blows in a short time, there to the navigation system manual. of the same rating or a lower rating is probably a serious electrical from one of the other circuits. Make problem in your vehicle. Leave the sure you can do without that circuit blown fuse in that circuit and have temporarily (such as the accessory your vehicle checked by a power socket or radio). qualified technician.

308 2009 Fit Fuse Locations

INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 1 10 A Back Up 26 10 A LAF 2 (7.5 A) TPMSꭧ 27 (30 A) Door Lock Mainꭧ 3 20 A Driver's Power Window 28 20 A Headlight Main 4 － Not Used 29 10 A Small Light 5 10 A Back Up Light 30 30 A Main Fan Motor 6 10 A SRS 31 － Not Used 7 (10 A) Transmission SOLꭧ 32 10 A Right Headlight Low Beam 8 7.5 A SRS 33 15 A IG Coil 9 (20 A) Fog Lightꭧ 34 10 A Left Headlight Low Beam 10 7.5 A A/Cꭧ 35 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ 11 7.5 A ABS/VSAꭧ 36 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ 12 10 A ACG 37 30 A ABS/VSAꭧ FSR 13 20 A ACC Socket 38 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ 14 7.5 A Key Lock/Radio 39 15 A IGP 15 7.5 A Daytime Running Light 40 － Not Used

16 10 A Rear Wiper 41 － Not Used Unexpected the of Care Taking 17 20 A Front Passenger's Power 42 － Not Used Window 43 (7.5 A) MG Clutch 18 20 A Rear Passenger's Side 44 7.5 A STS Power Window 45 － Not Used 19 20 A Rear Driver's Side Power － Window 46 Not Used 20 15 A Fuel Pump 47 (30 A) Sub Fan Motor 21 15 A Washer 48 10 A Left Headlight High Beam ꭧ 22 7.5 A Meter 49 (15 A) Door Lock ꭧ 23 10 A Hazard 50 (15 A) Door Lock 24 10 A Stop/Horn ꭧ: If equipped 25 － Not Used

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 309 Fuse Locations

No. Amps. Circuits Protected UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX Under-hood Fuse Box (On the battery) 51 10 A Right Headlight High Beam Amps. Circuits Protected 52 15 A DBW 100 A Battery － 53 Not Used 70 A EPS ꭧ 54 20 A Rear Defogger 20 A Horn/Hazard 55 10 A Heated Mirrorꭧ 56 30 A Front Wiper 57 30 A Blower Motor 58 30 A ABS/VSAꭧ Motor 59 20 A Rear Defogger 30 A 60 50 A/ IG Main/Option Main 40 A 61 30 A Radio 62 － Not Used ꭧ: If equipped

310 2009 Fit Emergency Towing

If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must call a professional towing service or be towed with the front wheels on organization. Never tow your vehicle the ground, do this: Improper towing preparation will with just a rope or chain. It is very damage the transmission. Follow the dangerous. Manual transmission: above procedure exactly. If you cannot ● Release the parking brake. shift the transmission or start the There are two ways to tow your engine (automatic transmission), your vehicle: ● Shift the transmission to neutral. vehicle must be transported with the Flat-bed Equipment － The operator ● Leave the ignition switch in the front wheels off the ground. loads your vehicle on the back of a ACCESSORY (I) position so the truck. This is the best way to steering wheel does not lock. With the front wheels on the ground, transport your vehicle. Automatic transmission: it is best to tow the vehicle no farther Wheel-lift Equipment － The tow than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the ● Release the parking brake. truck uses two pivoting arms that go speed below 35 mph (55 km/h). aigCr fteUnexpected the of Care Taking under the front tires and lift them off ● Start the engine. the ground. The rear tires remain on ● Shift to D position and hold for 5 the ground. This is an acceptable seconds, then to N. Let the engine way to tow your vehicle. run for 3 minutes, then turn it off.

● Turn off the engine.

● Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position so the steering wheel does not lock.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 311 Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the mud, or snow, call a towing service to bumpers will cause serious damage. pull it out (see page 311). The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight. For very short distances, such as freeing the vehicle, you can use the detachable towing hook that mounts on the anchor in the front bumper.

The steering system can be damaged if the steering wheel is locked. Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) To use the towing hook: position, and make sure the steering wheel turns freely before you begin 1. Take the towing hook and the towing. extension out of the tool kit in the cargo area. 2. Put a cloth on the notch of the cover. Using the extension, carefully pry on the notch of the cover to remove it.

312 2009 Fit If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

To avoid damage to your vehicle, use the towing hook for straight, flat ground towing only. Do not tow at an angle. The tow hook should not be used to tow the vehicle onto a flat bed. Do not use it as a tie down.

3. Screw the towing hook into the bolt hole behind the bumper, then

tighten the hook securely with the Unexpected the of Care Taking extension.

2009 Fit 313 314 2009 Fit Technical Information

The diagrams in this section give you Identification Numbers ...... 316 Emissions Testing...... 329 the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ...... 318 your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. identification numbers. It also Vehicles)...... 321 includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality know about your vehicle's tires and Grading...... 321 emissions control systems. Treadwear...... 321 Traction ...... 321 Temperature ...... 322 Tire Labeling ...... 323 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) － Required Federal Explanation ...... 324 Emissions Controls...... 326 The Clean Air Act...... 326

Crankcase Emissions Control Information Technical System ...... 326 Evaporative Emissions Control System ...... 326 Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery...... 326 Exhaust Emissions Controls ... 327 Replacement Parts ...... 327 Three Way Catalytic Converter...... 328

2009 Fit 315 Identification Numbers

Your vehicle has several identifying numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the 17-digit number your dealer uses to register your vehicle for warranty purposes. It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard. You can see it by looking through the windshield on the driver's side. It is also on the certification label COVER attached to the driver's doorjamb, and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also provided in bar code on the certification label. The VIN is also located on the engine bulkhead. Slide the cover on the engine compartment bulkhead to view the VIN. Always close the cover when finished. CERTIFICATION LABEL

316 2009 Fit Identification Numbers

The engine number is stamped into the front of the engine block. The transmission number is on a label on top of the transmission.

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSION NUMBER ehia Information Technical

2009 Fit 317 Specifications

Dimensions Engine Length 161.6 in (4,105 mm) Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC Width 66.7 in (1,695 mm) i-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine Height 60.0 in (1,525 mm) Bore x Stroke 2.87 x 3.52 in (73.0 x 89.4 mm) 98.4 in (2,500 mm) Displacement 91.3 cu-in (1,497 cm3) Track Front 58.7 in (1,492 mm)ꭧ1 58.1 in (1,476 mm)ꭧ2 Compression ratio 10.4 : 1 Rear 58.1 in (1,475mm)ꭧ1 Spark plugs IZFR6K13 (NGK) 57.4 in (1,459 mm)ꭧ2 SKJ20DR-M13 (DENSO) ꭧ1: All models except Sport ꭧ2: Sport model Weights Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached to the driver's doorjamb. Seating Capacities Total 5 Front 2 Rear 3

318 2009 Fit Specifications

Capacities Air Conditioning Fuel tank Approx. Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) 10.6 US gal (40 L) Charge quantity 13.1 － 14.8 oz ꭧ Engine oil Change 1 (370 －420 g) Including 3.8 US qt (3.6 L) Lubricant type SP-10 filter Without filter 3.6 US qt (3.4 L) Lights Total 4.4 US qt (4.2 L) Headlights High/Low 12 V － 60/55W (HB2) Engine Automatic Front turn signal lights 12 V － 21W (Amber) coolant transmission Parking lights/side marker 12 V － 3.8W (Amber) ꭧ2 Change 1.19 US gal (4.5 L) lights Total 1.32 US gal (5.0 L) Fog lightsꭧ 12 V － 55W (H11) Manual transmission Rear turn signal lights 12 V － 21W (Amber) Changeꭧ2 1.16 US gal (4.4 L) Stop/Taillights 12 V － 21/5W Total 1.29 US gal (4.9 L) － Automatic Change 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) Back-up lights 12 V 16W － transmission Total 6.18 US qt (5.85 L) License plate lights 12 V 5W ehia Information Technical fluid Ceiling light 12 V － 8W Manual Change 1.6 US qt (1.5 L) Cargo area light 12 V － 5W transmisson fluid Total 1.7 US qt (1.6 L) Map lightꭧ 12 V － 8W Windshield U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) High-mount brake light LED washer reservoir Canada Vehicles 4.8 US qt (4.5 L) ꭧ: For some types ꭧ1: Excluding the oil remaining in the engine ꭧ2: Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine Reserve tank capacity: 0.116 US gal (0.44 L)

2009 Fit 319 Specifications

Battery Tires Capacity 12 V － 32 AH/5 HR Size Front/Rear 175/65R15 84Sꭧ1 12 V － 34 AH/5 HR 185/55R16 83Hꭧ2 12 V － 40 AH/20 HR Spare T125/70D15 95Mꭧ3 ꭧ4 Fuses T135/80D15 99M Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, Interior See page 309 or the fuse label 2.2 kgf/cm2)ꭧ1 attached to the dashboard. 33 psi (230 kPa, Under-hood See page 310 or the fuse box cover. 2.3 kgf/cm2)ꭧ2 Alignment Spare 60 psi (420 kPa, Toe-in Front 0.0 in (0 mm) 4.2 kgf/cm2) Rear 0.10 in (2.5 mm) ꭧ1: All models except Sport Camber Front 0° ꭧ2: Sport model Rear －1° ꭧ3: On models without VSA system and all Canadian models with Caster Front 3°20' manual transmission ꭧ4: On models with VSA system

320 2009 Fit DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a The traction grades, from highest to All tires are also graded for comparative rating based on the wear lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those treadwear, traction, and temperature rate of the tire when tested under grades represent the tire's ability to performance according to controlled conditions on a specified stop on wet pavement as measured Department of Transportation (DOT) government test course. For under controlled conditions on standards. The following explains example, a tire graded 150 would specified government test surfaces of these gradings. wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times asphalt and concrete. A tire marked as well on the government course as C may have poor traction Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where a tire graded 100. The relative performance. performance of tires depends upon applicable on the tire sidewall Warning: The traction grade the actual conditions of their use, between tread shoulder and assigned to this tire is based on however, and may depart maximum section width. For straight-ahead braking traction tests, significantly from the norm due to example: and does not include acceleration, variations in driving habits, service Treadwear 200 cornering, hydroplaning, or peak practices and differences in road

Traction AA traction characteristics. Information Technical characteristics and climate. Temperature A All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

2009 Fit 321 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not tire's resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed, heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading, when tested under controlled either separately or in combination, conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure. temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

322 2009 Fit Tire Labeling

The tires that came on your vehicle Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN) have a number of markings. Those Whenever tires are replaced, they The tire identification number (TIN) you should be aware of are described should be replaced with tires of the is a group of numbers and letters that below. same size. Below is an example of look like the following example. TIN tire size with an explanation of what is located on the sidewall of the tire. TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE each component means. (1) DOT B97R FW6X 2202 185/55R16 83H DOT － This indicates that the tire 185 － Tire width in millimeters. meets all requirements of 55 － Aspect ratio (the tire's the U.S. Department of section height as a Transportation. percentage of its width). B97R － Manufacturer's R － Tire construction code (R identification mark. indicates radial). FW6X － Tire type code. 16 － Rim diameter in inches. 2202 － Date of manufacture. － 83 Load index (a numerical code Year Information Technical associated with the Week maximum load the tire can carry). (4) (1) H － Speed symbol (an (3) (2) alphabetical code indicating (1) Tire Size the maximum speed rating). (2) Tire Identification Number (TIN) (3) Maximum Tire Pressure (4) Maximum Tire Load

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 323 Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tireoverheat to and can lead toUnder-inflation tire also failure. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,affect and the may vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMSsubstitute is for not proper a tire maintenance, and it is theresponsibility driver's to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level toillumination trigger of the TPMS lowpressure tire telltale. Required Federal Explanation － 2009 Fit As an added safety feature,vehicle your has been equipped withpressure a monitoring tire system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tiretelltale pressure when one or more ofsignificantly your under-inflated. tires is Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check yoursoon tires as as possible, and inflatethe them proper to pressure. The maximum air The maximum load the Required Federal － － － Explanation tire can carry at maximumpressure. air Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Maximum Tire Pressure Max Press pressure the tire can hold. Maximum Tire Load Max Load U.S. models only Each tire, including the spareprovided), (if should be checked monthly when cold and inflatedthe to inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer onvehicle the placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tiressize of than a the different size indicatedvehicle on placard the or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressurethose for tires.) 324 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)－ Required Federal Explanation

Your vehicle has also been equipped Always check the TPMS malfunction with a TPMS malfunction indicator to telltale after replacing one or more indicate when the system is not tires or wheels on your vehicle to operating properly. The TPMS ensure that the replacement or malfunction indicator is provided by alternate tires and wheels allow the a separate telltale, which displays the TPMS to continue to function symbol ‘‘ TPMS ’’ when illuminated. properly. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,

the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a Information Technical variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

2009 Fit 325 Emissions Controls

The burning of gasoline in your ꭧ In Canada, Honda vehicles comply Evaporative Emissions Control vehicle's engine produces several with the Canadian emission System byproducts. Some of these are requirements, as specified in an As gasoline evaporates in the fuel carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of agreement with Environment tank, an evaporative emissions nitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons Canada, at the time they are control canister filled with charcoal (HC). Gasoline evaporating from the manufactured. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this tank also produces hydrocarbons. canister while the engine is off. After Crankcase Emissions Control Controlling the production of NOx, the engine is started and warmed up, System CO, and HC is important to the Your vehicle has a positive crankcase the vapor is drawn into the engine environment. Under certain ventilation system. This keeps and burned during driving. conditions of sunlight and climate, gasses that build up in the engine's Onboard Refueling Vapor NOx and HC react to form crankcase from going into the Recovery photochemical ‘‘ smog. ’’ Carbon atmosphere. The positive crankcase The onboard refueling vapor monoxide does not contribute to ventilation valve routes them from recovery (ORVR) system captures smog creation, but it is a poisonous the crankcase back to the intake the fuel vapors during refueling. The gas. manifold. They are then drawn into vapors are adsorbed in a canister The Clean Air Act the engine and burned. filled with activated carbon. While The United States Clean Air Actꭧ driving, the fuel vapors are drawn sets standards for automobile into the engine and burned off. emissions. It also requires that automobile manufacturers explain to owners how their emissions controls work and what to do to maintain them. This section summarizes how the emissions controls work.

326 2009 Fit Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter The exhaust emissions controls The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is include four systems: PGM-FI, multiport fuel injection. It has three in the exhaust system. Through ignition timing control, exhaust gas subsystems: air intake, engine chemical reactions, it converts HC, recirculation, and three way catalytic control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine's exhaust converter. These four systems work powertrain control module (PCM) in to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen together to control the engine's automatic transmission vehicles or (N2), and water vapor. combustion and minimize the the engine control module (ECM) in manual transmission vehicles uses Replacement Parts amount of HC, CO, and NOx that The emissions control systems are come out the tailpipe. The exhaust various sensors to determine how much air is going into the engine. It designed and certified to work emissions control systems are together in reducing emissions to separate from the crankcase and then controls how much fuel to inject under all operating conditions. levels that comply with the Clean Air evaporative emissions control Act. To make sure the emissions systems. Ignition Timing Control System remain low, you should use only new This system constantly adjusts the Honda replacement parts or their ignition timing, reducing the amount equivalent for repairs. Using lower of HC, CO, and NOx produced. Information Technical quality parts may increase the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) emissions from your vehicle. System The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) The emissions control systems are system takes some of the exhaust gas covered by warranties separate from and routes it back into the intake the rest of your vehicle. Read your manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the warranty manual for more air/fuel mixture reduces the amount information. of NOx produced when the fuel is burned.

2009 Fit 327 Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic converter ● Keep the engine well maintained. contains precious metals that serve ● Have your vehicle diagnosed and as catalysts, promoting chemical repaired if it is misfiring, reactions to convert the exhaust backfiring, stalling, or otherwise gasses without affecting the metals. not running properly. The catalytic converter is referred to as a three-way catalyst, since it acts on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement unit must be an original Honda part or its equivalent.

The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution, combustible materials that come and can impair your engine's near it. Park your vehicle away from performance. Follow these high grass, dry leaves, or other guidelines to protect your vehicle's flammables. three way catalytic converter. ● Always use unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals, making the three way catalytic converter ineffective.

328 2009 Fit Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that 4. Without touching the accelerator If you take your vehicle for an the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds. battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must 5. Keep the vehicle in Park gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the (automatic transmission) or This is because of certain ‘‘ readiness next two or three days, you can neutral (manual transmission). codes ’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by Increase the engine speed to 2,000 board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following. rpm, and hold it there until the systems. These codes are erased 1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly, temperature gauge rises to at least when the battery is disconnected, but not completely, full (around 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes). and set again only after several days 3/4). of driving under a variety of 6. Without touching the accelerator conditions. 2. Make sure the vehicle has been pedal, let the engine idle for 20 parked with the engine off for 6 seconds. hours or more.

3. Make sure the ambient Information Technical temperature is between 40° and 95°F.

CONTINUED

2009 Fit 329 Emissions Testing

7. Select a nearby lightly traveled 8. Then drive in city/suburban traffic major highway where you can for at least 10 minutes. When maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph traffic conditions allow, let the (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 vehicle coast for several seconds minutes. Drive on the highway in without using the accelerator pedal D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do or the brake pedal. not use the cruise control. When 9. Make sure the vehicle has been traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds parked with the engine off for 30 without moving the accelerator minutes. pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot If the testing facility determines the do this for a continuous 90 readiness codes are still not set, see seconds because of traffic your dealer. conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

330 2009 Fit Warranty and Customer Relations

Customer Service Information .... 332 Warranty Coverages ...... 333 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)...... 334 Relations Customer and Warranty Authorized Manuals...... 335

2009 Fit 331 Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give trained professionals. They should Customer Relations us this information: be able to answer all your questions. Honda Canada Inc. ● Vehicle Identification Number (see If you encounter a problem that your 715 Milner Avenue Toronto, ON page 316) dealership does not solve to your M1B 2K8 satisfaction, please discuss it with the ● Name and address of the dealer dealership's management. The Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 who services your vehicle service manager or general manager Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 ● Date of purchase can help. Almost all problems are Toronto (416) 287-4776 solved in this way. In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin ● Mileage on your vehicle Islands: If you are dissatisfied with the ● Your name, address, and Bella International decision made by the dealership's P.O. Box 190816 telephone number management, contact Honda San Juan, PR 00919-0816 ● A detailed description of the Customer Service. Tel: (787) 620-7546 problem U.S. Owners: ● Name of the dealer who sold the American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Automobile Customer Service vehicle to you Mail Stop 500-2N-7A 1919 Torrance Boulevard Torrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

332 2009 Fit Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty － a seat Replacement Battery Limited Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty － provides prorated warranties: covered by a limited warranty. Please coverage for a replacement battery arnyadCsoe Relations Customer and Warranty － read your warranty booklet for purchased from your dealer. New Vehicle Limited Warranty details. covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime the battery, emissions control Rust Perforation Limited Warranty － Limited Warranty － provides systems, and accessories against all exterior body panels are covered coverage for as long as the purchaser defects in materials and for rust-through from the inside for of the muffler owns the vehicle. workmanship. the specified time period with no Restrictions and exclusions apply to mileage limit. Emissions Control Systems Defects all these warranties. Please read the Warranty and Emissions Accessory Limited Warranty － 2009 Honda warranty information Performance Warranty － these two Honda accessories are covered booklet that came with your vehicle warranties cover your vehicle's under this warranty. Time and for precise information on warranty emissions control systems. Time, mileage limits depend on the type of coverages. Your vehicle's original mileage, and coverage are accessory and other factors. Please tires are covered by their conditional. Please read your read your warranty booklet for manufacturer. Tire warranty warranty booklet for exact details. information is in a separate booklet. information. Replacement Parts Limited Warranty Canadian Owners Original Equipment Battery Limited － covers all Honda replacement Please refer to the 2009 warranty Warranty － this warranty gives up to parts against defects in materials and manual that came with your vehicle. 100% credit toward a replacement workmanship. battery.

2009 Fit 333 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar To contact NHTSA, you may call the defect which could cause a crash or complaints, it may open an Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at could cause injury or death, you investigation, and if it finds that a 1-888-327-4236 should immediately inform the safety defect exists in a group of (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) ; go to National Highway Traffic Safety vehicles, it may order a recall and http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administration (NHTSA) in addition remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New to notifying American Honda Motor cannot become involved in individual Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC Co., Inc. problems between you, your dealer, 20590. You can also obtain other or American Honda Motor Co., Inc. information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

334 2009 Fit Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Service Manual: The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for You can order by phone or online: repair to engine and chassis components. It is written arnyadCsoe Relations Customer and Warranty ● Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand. ● Go online at www. helminc. com Electrical Troubleshooting Manual: If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth at 1-800-782-4356. troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in Publication Form Description your vehicle. Form Number Body Repair Manual: 61TK600 2009 Honda Fit Service Manual Describes the procedures involved in the replacement 61TK600EL 2009 Honda Fit of damaged body parts. Electrical Troubleshooting Manual 61TK630 2009 Honda Fit Body Repair Manual 31TK6600 2009 Honda Fit Owner's Manual 31TK6800 2009 Honda Fit Navigation System Owner's Manual 31TK6M00 2009 Honda Fit Honda Service History 31TK6Q00 2009 Honda Fit Quick Start Guide HON-R Order Form for Previous Years- Indicate Year and Model Desired

2009 Fit 335 336 2009 Fit Index

A Auto Control Mode, Starting Jump Starting ...... 299 Engine ...... 216 Maintenance ...... 279 AAA Auto Door Locking ...... 83 Specifications ...... 320 BBB ~CCC ...... 3 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .... 83 Before Driving ...... 197 Accessories and Auto Door Unlocking ...... 85 Belts, Seat ...... 8, 18 Modifications ...... 206 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ... 20 Beverage Holders ...... 106 ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Automatic Speed Control ...... 194 Booster Seats ...... 50 Position) ...... 80 Automatic Transmission ...... 219 Brakes Accessory Power Socket ...... 106 Capacity, Fluid ...... 319 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ...... 231 Additives, Engine Oil ...... 254 Checking Fluid Level ...... 259 Break-in, New Linings ...... 198 Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...... 77 Paddle Shifters ...... 224 Bulb Replacement ...... 266 Advanced Airbags ...... 27 Shifting ...... 219 Fluid ...... 261 Airbag (SRS) ...... 9, 22 Shift Lever Position Parking ...... 102 Air Conditioning System ...... 110 Indicators ...... 219 System Design ...... 230 Usage ...... 111 Shift Lever Positions ...... 220 System Indicator ...... 60, 305 Air Pressure, Tires ...... 273, 274 Shift Lock Release ...... 223 Wear Indicators ...... 230 Alcohol in Gasoline ...... 198 Automatic Transmission Fluid ... 259 Braking System ...... 230 Antifreeze ...... 256 Auxiliary Input Jack ...... 190 Break-in, New Vehicle ...... 198 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Average Fuel Mileage ...... 70 Brightness Control, INDEX Indicator Light ...... 62, 231 Instruments ...... 76 Operation ...... 231 B Anti-theft, Audio System ...... 191 Anti-theft Steering Column Battery Lock ...... 80 Charging System Audio System ...... 115 Indicator ...... 60, 303 CONTINUED 2009 Fit I Index

Bulb Replacement CD Player ...... 122, 149 Tether Anchorage Points ...... 47 Back-up Lights ...... 266 Certification Label ...... 316 Cleaning the Seat Belts ...... 267 Brake Lights ...... 266 Chains, Tires ...... 278 Clock ...... 192 Fog Lights ...... 265 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 285 Clutch Fluid ...... 261 Front Parking Lights ...... 263 Changing Oil Code, Audio System ...... 191 Front Side Marker Lights ...... 263 How to ...... 254 CO in the Exhaust ...... 53, 326 Headlights ...... 262 When to ...... 245 Cold Weather, Starting in ...... 216 Rear Bulbs ...... 266 Charging System Compact Spare Tire ...... 284 Specifications ...... 319 Indicator ...... 60, 303 Consumer Information (U.S. Taillights ...... 266 Check Fuel Cap Indicator ...... 70 only) ...... 332 Turn Signal Lights ...... 263, 266 Checklist, Before Driving ...... 215 Controls, Instruments and ...... 57 Bulbs, Halogen ...... 262 Childproof Door Locks ...... 82 Coolant Child Safety ...... 34 Adding ...... 256 Booster Seats ...... 50 Checking ...... 202 C Child Seats ...... 39, 41 Proper Solution ...... 256 Important Safety Reminders ..... 38 Temperature Indicator ...... 63 Cancel Button ...... 196 Infants ...... 39 Crankcase Emissions Control Capacities Chart ...... 318 Large Children ...... 49 System ...... 326 Carbon Monoxide Hazard ...... 53 LATCH ...... 43 Cruise Control Indicator ...... 65 Cargo ...... 208 Risks with Airbags ...... 35 Cruise Control Operation ...... 194 Cargo Hook ...... 212 Small Children ...... 40 Cup Holders ...... 106 Cargo, How to Carry ...... 208 Tethers ...... 47 Current Fuel Mileage ...... 70 Carrying Cargo ...... 208 Warning Labels ...... 36 Customer Service Office ...... 332 CAUTION, Explanation of ...... iii Where Should a Child Sit? ...... 35 CD Care ...... 186 Child Seats ...... 34, 41 CD Error Messages ...... 128, 157 LATCH Anchorage Points ...... 43

II 2009 Fit Index

D Doors Charging System Indicator ..... 303 Childproof Door Locks ...... 82 Checking the Fuses ...... 307 DANGER, Explanation of ...... iii Locking and Unlocking ...... 81 Driving with a Flat Tire ...... 284 Dashboard ...... 3, 58 Power Door Locks ...... 81 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 76 Daytime Running Lights (Canada DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Jump Starting ...... 299 only) ...... 75 Vehicles) ...... 321 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ..... 303 Daytime Running Lights Indicator Downshifting, Manual Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 304 (Canada only) ...... 65 Transmission ...... 217 Overheated Engine ...... 301 Dead Battery ...... 299 Driver and Passenger Safety ...... 5 Towing ...... 311 Defects, Reporting Safety ...... 334 Driving ...... 213 Emergency Brake ...... 102 Defogger, Rear Window ...... 76 Economy ...... 203 Emergency Flashers ...... 76 Defrosting the Windows ...... 113 Driving Guidelines ...... 214 Emergency Towing ...... 311 Detachable Anchor ...... 99 Driving with the Paddle Shifters Emissions Controls ...... 326 Dimensions ...... 318 (Sport only) ...... 224 Emissions Testing ...... 329 Dimming the Headlights ...... 74 Dust and Pollen Filter ...... 268 Dipstick Automatic Transmission ...... 259 E Engine Oil ...... 201 INDEX Directional Signals ...... 63 Economy, Fuel ...... 203 Wear Indicators ...... 230 Electric Power Steering (EPS) Disc Care ...... 186 Indicator ...... 62 Disc Player Error Emergencies on the Road ...... 283 Messages ...... 128, 157 Battery, Jump Starting ...... 299 Disposal of Used Oil ...... 255 Brake System Indicator ...... 305 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 285 CONTINUED 2009 Fit III Index

Engine Features, Comfort and Octane Requirement ...... 198 Adding Engine Coolant ...... 256 Convenience ...... 109 Oxygenated ...... 198 Coolant Temperature Filling the Fuel Tank ...... 199 Reserve Indicator ...... 62 Indicator ...... 63 Filters Tank, Filling the ...... 199 If it Won’t Start ...... 297 Dust and Pollen ...... 268 Fuel Economy ...... 203 Malfunction Indicator Oil ...... 254 Fuses, Checking the ...... 307 Lamp ...... 60, 304 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 76 Oil Life Indicator ...... 245 Flat Tire, Changing a ...... 285 Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 60, 303 Floor Mats ...... 267 G Oil, What Kind to Use ...... 253 Fluids Overheating ...... 301 Automatic Transmission ...... 259 Gas Mileage, Improving ...... 203 Specifications ...... 318 Brake ...... 261 Gasohol ...... 198 Speed Limiter ...... 218, 222 Clutch ...... 261 Gasoline ...... 198 Starting ...... 216 Manual Transmission ...... 260 Gauge ...... 68 Ethanol in Gasoline ...... 198 Windshield Washer ...... 258 Low Fuel Indicator ...... 62 Evaporative Emissions FM/AM Radio Reception ...... 184 Octane Requirement ...... 198 Controls ...... 326 Four-way Flashers ...... 76 Tank, Refueling ...... 199 Exhaust Fumes ...... 53 Front Airbags ...... 9, 25 Gas Station Procedures ...... 199 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Front Seat Gauges Belts by ...... 16 Adjusting ...... 93 Fuel ...... 70 Airbags ...... 9, 25 Speedometer ...... 68 Fuel ...... 198 Gearshift Lever Positions F Check Fuel Cap Indicator ...... 70 Automatic Transmission ...... 220 Fill Door and Cap ...... 199 Manual Transmission ...... 217 Fan, Interior ...... 111 Gauge ...... 70 Glove Box ...... 105 Low Fuel Indicator ...... 62

IV 2009 Fit Index

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Horn ...... 72 Fog Lights ...... 64 (GVWR) ...... 209 Hydraulic Clutch ...... 261 High Beam ...... 65 High Temperature ...... 63 Key (Immobilizer System) ...... 66 H I Lights On ...... 64 Low Fuel ...... 62 Halogen Headlight Bulbs ...... 262 Identification Number, Low Oil Pressure ...... 60, 303 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 76 Vehicle ...... 316 Low Temperature ...... 63 Headlights ...... 74, 75 Ignition Low Tire Pressure (U.S. Aiming ...... 262 Keys ...... 78 only) ...... 64, 235 Daytime Running Lights (Canada Switch ...... 80 Maintenance Minder ...... 66, 245 only) ...... 75 Timing Control System ...... 327 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 304 High Beam Indicator ...... 65 Immobilizer System ...... 79 Passenger Airbag Off ...... 31 High Beams, Turning on ...... 74 Important Safety Precautions ...... 6 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 18, 60 Lights On Indicator ...... 64 Indicators, Instrument Panel ...... 59 Security System ...... 66 Low Beams, Turning on ...... 74 ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ...... 62, 231 Side Airbag Off ...... 61 Reminder Chime ...... 75 Brake (Parking and Brake SRS ...... 30, 61 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ...... 262 System) ...... 60, 305 TPMS (U.S. only) ...... 64, 236 Turning on ...... 74 Charging System ...... 60, 303 Turn Signal and Hazard INDEX Head Restraints ...... 94 Check Fuel Cap ...... 70 Warning ...... 63 Heated Mirror ...... 102 Cruise Control ...... 65 VSA System ...... 67 Heating and Cooling ...... 110 Cruise Main ...... 65 Washer Level ...... 65 High Beam Lever ...... 75 Door and Tailgate Open ...... 62 Infant Restraint ...... 39 High-Low Beam Switch ...... 74 DRL (Daytime Running Lights) Infant Seats ...... 39 Hood, Opening and Closing (Canada only) ...... 65 Tether Anchorage Point ...... 47 the ...... 200 Electric Power Steering ...... 62 CONTINUED 2009 Fit V Index

Inflation, Proper Tire ...... 273 L Low Oil Pressure Recommended Pressures ...... 274 Indicator ...... 60, 303 Inside Mirror ...... 101 Label, Certification ...... 316 Lubricant Specifications Chart ... 319 Inspection, Tire ...... 275 Lane Change, Signaling ...... 74 Luggage, Storing (cargo) ...... 208 Installing a Child Seat ...... 42 Lap/Shoulder Belt ...... 14, 19 Instrument Panel ...... 59 LATCH Anchorage System ...... 43 M Instrument Panel Brightness ...... 76 Lights Instruments and Controls ...... 57 Bulb Replacement ...... 262 Interior Lights ...... 107 Maintenance ...... 243 Indicator ...... 59 Main Items and Sub Items ...... 248 Introduction ...... i Interior ...... 107 iPod® Error Messages ...... 135, 176 Minder ...... 245 Parking ...... 74 Minder Indicator ...... 66 Turn Signal ...... 74 Owner's Maintenance J Load Limit ...... 209 Checks ...... 250 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ...... 80 Safety ...... 244 Jacking up the Vehicle ...... 285 Locks Schedule ...... 251 Jack, Tire ...... 285 Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 80 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...... 304 Jump Starting ...... 299 Childproof Door ...... 82 Manual Transmission ...... 217 Fuel Fill Door ...... 199 Checking Fluid Level ...... 260 Lockout Prevention ...... 82 Shifting ...... 217 K Power Door ...... 81 Manual Transmission Fluid ...... 260 Tailgate ...... 88 Meters, Gauges ...... 68 Keys ...... 78 Low Coolant Level ...... 202 Methanol in Gasoline ...... 198 Lower Anchors ...... 43 Mirrors, Adjusting ...... 101 Lower Glove Box ...... 105 Modifications ...... 207 Low Fuel Indicator ...... 62 Modifying Your Vehicle ...... 207

VI 2009 Fit Index

N Owner's Maintenance Checks .... 250 Power Door Locks ...... 81 Oxygenated Fuels ...... 198 Power Socket Locations ...... 106 Neutral Gear Position ...... 221 Power Windows ...... 100 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts ...... 16 New Vehicle Break-in ...... 198 P Normal Shift Speeds ...... 218 Preparing to Drive ...... 215 Protecting Adults and Teens ...... 11 NOTICE, Explanation of ...... i Paddle Shifters ...... 224 Numbers, Identification ...... 316 Additional Safety Precautions ... 17 Panel Brightness Control ...... 76 Advice for Pregnant Women .... 16 Park Gear Position ...... 220 Protecting Children ...... 34 O Parking ...... 229 General Guidelines ...... 34 Parking Brake ...... 102 Protecting Infants ...... 39 Odometer ...... 70 Parking Brake and Brake System Protecting Larger Children ...... 49 Odometer, Trip ...... 69 Indicator ...... 60, 305 Protecting Small Children ...... 40 Oil Parking Lights ...... 74 Using Child Seats with Change, How to ...... 254 Parking Over Things that Tethers ...... 47 Change, When to ...... 245 Burn ...... 229, 328 Using LATCH ...... 43 Checking Engine ...... 201 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .... 31 Life, Engine ...... 245 PGM-FI System ...... 327 Pressure Indicator ...... 60, 303 Playing a Disc ...... 122, 149 R INDEX ® Selecting Proper Viscosity Playing an iPod ...... 129, 170 Chart ...... 253 Playing a PC card ...... 158 Radiator Overheating ...... 301 Onboard Refueling Vapor Playing a USB Flash Memory Radio/CD Sound System ...... 115 Recovery ...... 326 Device ...... 136, 177 Radio Theft Protection ...... 191 ON (Ignition Key Position) ...... 80 Playing the AM/FM Radio ...... 143 Readiness Codes ...... 329 Outside Mirrors ...... 101 Playing the FM/AM Radio ...... 115 Rear Lights, Bulb Overheating, Engine ...... 301 Pollen Filter ...... 268 Replacement ...... 266 CONTINUED 2009 Fit VII Index

Rear View Mirror ...... 101 Rotation, Tire ...... 276 Reminder Indicator and Rear Window Defogger ...... 76 Beeper ...... 18, 60 Rear Window Wiper and System Components ...... 18 Washer ...... 73 S Use During Pregnancy ...... 16 Recommended Shift Speeds ...... 218 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Refueling ...... 199 Safety Belts ...... 8, 18 Belt ...... 14, 19 Reminder Indicators ...... 60 Safety Defects, Reporting (U.S. Seats ...... 93 Remote Audio Controls ...... 189 only) ...... 334 Seats, Adjusting the ...... 93 Remote Transmitter ...... 90 Safety Features ...... 7 Seat Under Box ...... 106 Replacement Information Airbags ...... 9 Security System ...... 193 Dust and Pollen Filter ...... 268 Door Locks ...... 11 Sensors Engine Oil and Filter ...... 254 Head Restraints ...... 13 Driver's Seat Position Sensor ... 27 Fuses ...... 306 Seat Belts ...... 8, 14 Front Passenger's Weight Light Bulbs ...... 262 Seats & Seat-Backs ...... 11, 12 Sensors ...... 27 Schedule ...... 251 Safety Labels, Location of ...... 54 Impact Sensors ...... 22, 23 Tires ...... 276 Safety Messages ...... iii Serial Number ...... 316 Wiper Blades ...... 269 Seat Belts ...... 8, 18 Service Intervals ...... 245 Replacing Seat Belts After a Additional Information ...... 18 Service Manual (U.S. only) ...... 335 Crash ...... 20 Advice for Pregnant Women .... 16 Service Station Procedures ...... 199 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Automatic Seat Belt Setting the Clock ...... 192 Vehicles) ...... 334 Tensioners ...... 20 Shifting the Automatic Reserve Tank, Engine Cleaning ...... 267 Transmission ...... 219 Coolant ...... 202, 256 Detachable Anchor ...... 99 Shift Lever Position Indicators ... 219 Restraint, Child ...... 34 Lap/Shoulder Belt ...... 14, 19 Shift Lock Release ...... 223 Reverse Gear Position ...... 221 Maintenance ...... 20 Reverse Lockout ...... 223

VIII 2009 Fit Index

Side Airbags ...... 28 How the SRS Indicator Works .. 30 System Components ...... 22 How the Side Airbag Off How Your Front Airbags Synthetic Oil ...... 254 Indicator Works ...... 31 Works ...... 25 How Your Side Airbags Work .. 28 How Your Side Airbags Work .. 28 Off Indicator ...... 31 How Your Side Curtain Airbags T Side Curtain Airbags ...... 30 Work ...... 30 How Your Side Curtain Airbags SRS Indicator ...... 30, 61 Tachometer ...... 68 Work ...... 30 START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 80 Tailgate ...... 88 Side Marker Lights, Bulb Starting the Engine ...... 216 Open Indicator ...... 62 Replacement in ...... 263 In Cold Weather at High Opening the ...... 88 Signaling Turns ...... 63 Altitude ...... 216 Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ..... 266 Snow Tires ...... 278 With a Dead Battery ...... 299 Taking Care of the Sound System ...... 115 State Emissions Testing ...... 329 Unexpected ...... 283 Spare Tire ...... 284 Steam Coming from Engine ...... 301 Technical Descriptions Inflating ...... 273, 284 Steering Wheel DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Spark Plugs ...... 318 Adjustment ...... 77 Vehicles) ...... 321 Specifications ...... 318 Anti-theft Column Lock ...... 80 Emissions Control Systems ..... 326 Speed Control ...... 194 Buttons ...... 189 Three Way Catalytic Speed Limiter ...... 218, 222 Steering Wheel Buttons ...... 194 Converter ...... 328 INDEX Speedometer 68 Stereo Sound System 115 Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...... － SRS, Additional Information ...... 22 Storing Your Vehicle ...... 281 (TPMS) Required Federal Additional Safety Precautions ... 33 Sun Visor ...... 106 Explanation ...... 324 Airbag Service ...... 32 Supplemental Restraint Temperature Indicator ...... 63 Airbag System Components ..... 22 System ...... 9, 22 Temporarily Repairing a Flat How the Side Airbag Off Servicing ...... 32 Tire ...... 291 Indicator Works ...... 31 SRS Indicator ...... 30, 61 Tensioners, Seat Belts ...... 20 CONTINUED 2009 Fit IX Index

Tether Anchorage Points ...... 47 Pressure Monitoring System Turn Signals ...... 63 Theft Protection, Radio ...... 191 (U.S. only) ...... 235 Three Way Catalytic Replacing ...... 276 Converter ...... 328 Rotating ...... 276 U Tilt the Steering Wheel ...... 77 Snow ...... 278 Time, Setting the ...... 192 Specifications ...... 320 Unexpected, Taking Care of Tire Chains ...... 278 Tools, Tire Changing ...... 285 the ...... 283 Tire, How to Change a Flat ...... 285 Towing Uniform Tire Quality Grading Tire Information ...... 323 A Trailer ...... 238 (U.S. only) ...... 321 Tire Labeling ...... 323 Emergency Wrecker ...... 311 Unleaded Gasoline ...... 198 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Upper Glove Box ...... 105 (TPMS) ...... 235, 324 System) (U.S. only) ...... 235 USB Flash Memory Device Error Tires ...... 273 Indicator (U.S.only) ...... 64, 236 Messages ...... 142, 183 Air Pressure ...... 274 Required Federal Used Oil, How to Dispose of ...... 255 Chains ...... 278 Explanation ...... 324 Checking Wear ...... 275 Transmission V Compact Spare ...... 284 Checking Fluid Level, DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Automatic ...... 259 Vehicle Capacity Load ...... 209 Vehicles) ...... 321 Checking Fluid Level, Vehicle Dimensions ...... 318 Inflation ...... 273 Manual ...... 260 Vehicle Identification Number ... 316 Inspection ...... 275 Fluid Selection ...... 259, 260 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), Labeling ...... 323 Identification Number ...... 316 aka Electronic Stability Low Tire Pressure Indicator Shifting the Automatic ...... 219 Control (ESC), System .... 233 (U.S. only) ...... 64, 235 Shifting the Manual ...... 217 VSA System Indicator ...... 67 Maintenance ...... 276 Treadwear ...... 321 Vehicle Storage ...... 281 Trip Meter ...... 69

X 2009 Fit Index

Ventilation ...... 112 Windshield VIN ...... 316 Cleaning ...... 73 Viscosity, Oil ...... 253 Defroster ...... 113 Washers ...... 73, 258 Wipers, Windshield W Changing Blades ...... 269 Operation ...... 73 WARNING, Explanation of ...... iii Worn Tires ...... 275 Warning Labels, Location of ...... 54 Wrecker, Emergency Towing .... 311 Warranty Coverages (U.S. only) ...... 333 Washer, Windshield Checking the Fluid Level ...... 258 Fluid Level Indicator (Canada only) ...... 65 Operation ...... 73 Wheels Adjusting the Steering ...... 77

Alignment and Balance ...... 276 INDEX Compact Spare ...... 284 Wrench, Nut ...... 285 Windows Auto Down ...... 101 Auto Reverse ...... 101 Operating the Power ...... 100 Rear, Defogger ...... 76

2009 Fit XI Service Information Summary

Gasoline: Manual Transmission Fluid: Brake Fluid: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid number of 87 or higher. preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 or DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or 10W-40 motor oil as a temporary DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary Fuel Tank Capacity: replacement (see page 260). replacement (see page 261). 10.6 US gal (40 L) Capacity (including differential): Tire Pressure (measured cold): Recommended Engine Oil: 1.6 US qt (1.5 L) Front/Rear: API Premium grade 5W-20 detergent oil (see page 253). All models except Sport 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) Oil change capacity (including filter): Sport model 3.8 US qt (3.6 L) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) Automatic Transmission Fluid: Spare Tire Pressure: Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) (Automatic Transmission Fluid) (see page 259).

2009 Fit Owner's Identification

OWNER ______This owner's manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should ______remain with the vehicle when it is sold. ADDRESS ______This owner's manual covers all models of the Fit. You may find descriptions of equipment STREET and features that are not on your particular vehicle. ______The information and specifications included CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ in this publication were in effect at the time of POSTAL CODE approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. V. I. N. ______reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time DELIVERY DATE ______without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever. (Date sold to original retail purchaser) DEALER NAME ______DEALER NO. ______POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN AVIS ADDRESS ______IMPORTANT: Si vous avez besoin d'un Manuel du Conducteur en français, STREET veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire de commander le ______numéro de pièce 33TK6C00 CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE OWNER'S SIGNATURE ______DEALER'S SIGNATURE ______

2009 Fit